RBM Pro Advanced Fast Bal: Consultant

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 422

97059.2_Fast Bal.

book Page i Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Reference Manual

RBMCONSULTANT Pro ®

Advanced Fast Bal


Dynamic Balance Analyzer

CSI Part # 97059, Rev. 2


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page ii Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Copyright FAX: 32/16/74.14.19


© 2007 by Emerson Process Management. emacust@emersonprocess.com
All rights reserved. Asia Pacific
No part of this publication may be reproduced, trans- Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form by any means 1 Pandan Crescent
without the written permission of Emerson Process Singapore 128461
Management. Phone: 65.67708706

Disclaimer FAX: 65.67708006


This manual is provided for informational purposes. MHM-TechSupport@AP.EmersonProcess.com
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT MAKES NO WAR-
RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, Worldwide Web:
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
http://www.MHM.AssetWeb.com
TICULAR PURPOSE. Emerson Process Management shall
AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual
not be liable for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies
that may be contained herein or for incidental or con- This document was written, illustrated, and produced
sequential damages in connection with the furnishing, by Emerson Process Management’s Engineering Publi-
performance, or use of this material. Information in this cations Group on Power Macintosh™ workstations
document is subject to change without notice and does using Adobe™ FrameMaker®, Adobe PhotoShop®, and
not represent a commitment on the part of Emerson Macromedia® FreeHand™. Printed copies are produced
Process Management. The information in this manual is using the Xerox™ DocuTech™ publishing system.
not all-inclusive and cannot cover all unique situations.
Trademarks and Servicemarks
Product Support Emerson Process Management logo; Infranalysis; Infra-
Should you have any comments on this documentation Route; MachineView; MotorView; Nspectr; OilView
or questions concerning the Agreement on the fol- (Japan); AMS Machinery Manager; Reliability-Based
lowing pages, please contact Emerson Process Manage- Maintenance, and logo; are registered trademarks of
ment’s Product Support Department. Emerson Process Management.

Addresses: PeakVue; RBMview; AMS Machinery Manager (Aus-


tralia, China, Japan); RBMwizard; Reliability-Based
The Americas and Canada Maintenance (Venezuela); SonicScan; SST; VibPro; and
Emerson Process Management VibView are pending trademarks of Emerson Process
835 Innovation Drive Management.
Knoxville, TN 37932 USA Lubricant Profile and Trivector are registered service-
marks of Emerson Process Management.
Phone: 865-675-4274
RBM; AMS Machinery Manager (China); Reliability-
FAX: 865-218-1416
Based Maintenance (Venezuela); and design are
mhm.custserv@emersonprocess.com pending servicemarks of Emerson Process Manage-
Europe and Middle East ment.
Emerson Process Management Adobe is a trademark and FrameMaker and PhotoShop
Research Park Inerleuvenlaan 50 Leuven 3001 are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Power
Belgium Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Mac-
romedia is a registered trademark and FreeHand is a
Phone: 32/16/74/.14.71
trademark of Macromedia, Inc. Xerox and DocuTech
UK 441516779418 are trademarks of Xerox Corporation.

ii
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page iii Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

All other brand or product names are trademarks or reg- up to any applicable maximum number of licensed
istered trademarks of their respective companies. users. You may not relicense the Software or use the
Software for third party training, commercial time shar-
Patents ing, rental, or service bureau use. Client may not use the
The product(s) described in this manual are covered Software in, as, or with an ASP (Application Service Pro-
under existing and pending patents. vider).

License Agreement
Software Updates
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS
CSI agrees to provide you, at no charge except for
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE
media, preparation and shipping charges, for one (1)
OPENING THE PACKAGE OR PROCEEDING WITH
year from the date of purchase, all updates to the soft-
INSTALLATION. OPENING THE PACKAGE OR COM-
ware made at the sole discretion of CSI. Should you pur-
PLETING THE INSTALLATION INDICATES YOUR
chase a software support agreement for the next
ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
succeeding year following the first year from the date of
CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
purchase, and thereafter on an annual basis, and if CSI
is still providing support, you may purchase the same,
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CON- annually, at the then existing rate.
DITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT, .
CANCEL ANY INSTALLATION AND PROMPTLY
RETURN THIS PRODUCT AND THE ASSOCIATED Updates/Upgrades
DOCUMENTATION TO CSI, AND YOUR MONEY Upon receipt of new CSI software replacing older CSI
WILL BE REFUNDED. NO REFUNDS WILL BE GIVEN software, you have 30 days to install and test the new
FOR PRODUCTS WITH DAMAGED OR MISSING CSI software on the same or a different device. At the
COMPONENTS. end of the 30-day test period, you must both remove
and return the new CSI software or remove the older CSI
software.
Definition of Software
As used herein, “software” refers to any computer pro- Ownership
gram contained on any medium. Software includes
The licensed software and all derivatives are the sole
downloadable firmware for use in devices such as ana-
property of Computational Systems, Inc. You may not
lyzers or MotorStatus units and it includes computer
disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise
programs executable on computers or computer net-
translate the licensed program. You may not distribute
works.
copies of the program or documentation, in whole or in
part, to another party. You may not in any way distort, or
Software License otherwise modify the program or any part of the docu-
mentation without prior written consent from CSI.
You have the non-exclusive right to use this software on
only one device at a time. You may back-up the soft- Transfer
ware for archival purposes. For network systems, you
You may transfer the software and license to another
have the non-exclusive right to install this software on
party only with the written consent of CSI and only if the
only one server. Read/write access is limited to the num-
other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of
ber of concurrent use licenses purchased. The number
this Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must
of guest-only accesses is up to a maximum of 250.
transfer the documentation and any backup copies or
transfer only the documentation and destroy any
CSI grants you a non-exclusive right to use the Software
backup copies.
solely for your own internal data processing operations
on the CSI designated supported operating platform for

iii
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page iv Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Copyright technical data and/or the direct product of it to other


The software and documentation are copyrighted. All countries, including, without limitation, the U.S. Export
rights are reserved. Administration Regulations.

Termination U.S. Government Rights


If you commit a material breach of this Agreement, CSI When provided to the U.S. government, the computer
may terminate the Agreement by written notice. software and related materials and documentation are
provided subject to the same license rights as those enu-
Virus Disclaimer merated above.
CSI uses the latest virus checking technologies to test all
its software. However, since no antivirus system is Hardware Technical Help
100% reliable, we strongly advise that you use an anti- 1. Please have the number of the current version of
virus system in which you have confidence to verify the your firmware ready when you call. The version
software is virus-free. CSI makes no representations or of the firmware in Emerson Process Management’s
warranties to the effect that the licensed software is CSI 2100 series, CSI 2400, and other analyzers
virus-free. appears on the power-up screen that is displayed
when the analyzer is turned on.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of
NO WARRANTY your problem. For example, what are the error
THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" WITHOUT messages? When do they occur? Know what you
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR were doing when the problem occurred. For
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY example, what mode were you in? What steps did
WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY you go through? Try to determine before you call
whether the problem is repeatable.
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Hardware Repair
Emerson Process Management repairs and updates its
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES hardware products free for one year from the date of
IN NO EVENT WILL CSI BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY purchase. This service warranty includes hardware
THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES, improvement, modification, correction, recalibration,
INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, update, and maintenance for normal wear. This service
OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL warranty excludes repair of damage from misuse,
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE abuse, neglect, carelessness, or modification performed
INABILITY TO USE THIS PROGRAM. by anyone other than Emerson Process Management.
After the one year service warranty expires, each return
of a Emerson Process Management hardware product is
THE LICENSEE'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN subject to a minimum service fee. If the cost of repair
THE EVENT OF A DEFECT exceeds this minimum fee, we will call you with an esti-
IN WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL IS mate before performing any work. Contact Emerson
EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT OF Process Management’s Product Support Department for
THE DISKETTES OR OTHER MEDIA. IN NO information concerning the current rates.
EVENT WILL CSI'S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PUR-
CHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.
Export Restrictions
You agree to comply fully with all laws, regulations,
decrees and orders of the Unites States of America that
restrict or prohibit the exportation (or re-exportation) of

iv
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page v Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Obsolete Hardware Returning Items


Although Emerson Process Management will honor all 1. Call Product Support (see page 2) to obtain a return
contractual agreements and will make every effort to authorization number. Please write it clearly and
ensure that its software packages are “backward com- prominently on the outside of the shipping
patible,” to take advantage of advances in newer hard- container.
ware platforms and to keep our programs reasonably 2. If returning for credit, return all accessories
small, Emerson Process Management reserves the right originally shipped with the item(s). Include cables,
to discontinue support for old or out-of-date hardware software diskettes, manuals, etc.
items.
3. Enclose a note that describes the reason(s) you are
Software Technical Help returning the item(s).
1. Please have the number of the current version of 4. Insure your package for return shipment. Shipping
your software ready when you call. The version costs and any losses during shipment are your
number for software operating under Windows® is responsibility. COD packages cannot be accepted
displayed by selecting “About” under the Help and will be returned unopened.
menu bar item.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of
your problem. For example, what are the error
messages? (If possible, make a printout of the error
message.) When do they occur? Know what you
were doing when the problem occurred. For
example, what mode were you in? What steps did
you go through? Try to determine before you call
whether the problem is repeatable.
3. Please be at your computer when you call. We can
serve you better when we can work through the
problem together.

Software Technical Support


Emerson Process Management provides technical sup-
port through the following for those under support
agreement:
• Telephone assistance and communication via the
Internet.
• Mass updates that are released during that time.
• Interim updates upon request. Please contact
Emerson Process Management Product Support for
more information.

v
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page vi Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

vi
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page v Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Contents

Chapter 1 • Read This First


How To Use This Manual · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-1
Analyzer Serialization· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-1
Introduction · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-2
UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-2
Emphasis Paragraphs · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-3
Available Equipment and Options · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-4
Fast Bal Accessories · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-6

Chapter 2 • Using the Balance Program


General Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-1
UltraMgr/Fast Bal Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-2
Case Studies · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-3
Balancing Outline · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-5
Basic Balance Job Steps · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-5
Program Sequence· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-6
Main Menu · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-6
Job Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-14
Balance Job and Tach Configuration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-17
Basic and Advanced Job Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-18
Tach Configuration · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-26
Speed Setup· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-30
Sensor Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-33
Measurement Plane Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-35
Measurement Plane Setup - Default Settings · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-45
Weight Plane Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-46
Acquiring Balance Data· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-53
Acquire Data Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-54
Select Measurement · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-55
Trial Run 1, 2, 3, 4 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-58
Trial Run Weight Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-59
Select Measurement Speed (Advanced Mode only) · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-67

v
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page vi Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Measurement Point · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-69


Acquiring Readings · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-73
Acquiring Data - Reference Run Balancing Watchdog · · · · · · · · · · 2-78
Vibration is Direction Sensitive · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-79
Axial 1xRPM Vibration Greater than Radial · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-80
Acquiring Data - Trial Run Balancing Watchdog · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-81
View Balance Correction · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-84
Trim Run · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-89
Trim Run Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-90
Trim Run Status · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-90
Applied Weight· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-92
Estimate Results · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-96
Acquire Trim Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-103
Select Measurement Speed (Advanced Mode only)· · · · · · · · · · · · 2-103
Select Measurement Point · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-105
Acquiring Readings · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-111
Acquire Trim Data – Tolerance Check· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-116
Using The Alternate Keys · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-127
Review/Edit Data Key · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-130
Reviewing Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-131
Reviewing Data - Influence Coefficients · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-136
Reviewing Data - Tolerance Check · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-138
Editing Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-141
Calculator Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-152
Split Angle Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-155
Sum Weights Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-159
Adjust Fixed Weights Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-164
Static/Couple Analysis Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-168
Estimate Trial Weight Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-172
Circumference Conversion Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-179
Adjust Radius Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-183
Amplification Factor Calculation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-187
Units Conversion Calculation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-190
View Balance Correction · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-192
Notes· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-197
Add Notes · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-197
How Do I ... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-198
Print Job · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2-200

vi
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page vii Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 3 • RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


Introduction · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-1
Selecting a Device Name · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-2
Connecting using USB, Serial, or Ethernet · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-5
USB Connection · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-6
Using the USB Option · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-10
Serial Port Connection · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-12
Ethernet Card Connection · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-16
Brief review of setting up Ethernet connection· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-17
Setting up Host Information · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-20
Understanding RBMcom · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-25
RBMcom Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-26
Creating a Route File and copying it to a Folder · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-40
Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-43
Downloading Balance Jobs with RBMcom · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-43
Uploading Job Data using RBMcom · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-48
Uploading Data Files from the Analyzer to a Selected Folder · · · · · 3-53
Transferring between Machinery Health Manager
Databases and Data Files · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-57
Connecting Using the Analyzer · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-59
Downloading a Job Using the Analyzer · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-59
Uploading Data Using the Analyzer · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-65
Updating the Base Firmware · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3-71

Chapter 4 • Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-1
Beginning the Balancing Procedure · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-2
Balance Job Setup · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-2
Acquire the Balance Data – Reference (as-is) Run· · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-17
Acquire the Balance Data – Trial Run #2 Data· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-36
Make the Required Trim Correction · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-43
Assigning Notes to the Job · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4-58

vii
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page viii Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 5 • Field Balancing Application Notes


Overview · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-1
Extending Machine Life · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-2
Be Consistent · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-4
Trim Balancing · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-5
Field Balancing - Before You Begin... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-6
A Few Basics to Keep in Mind· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-7
Analyze the Problem · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-7
Prepare for the Balance Job · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-10
General Outline for a “First Time” Balancing Procedure · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-11
Step 1 - Define the Balance Job · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-13
Step 2 - Acquire As-is Data · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-15
Step 3 - Acquire Trial Run Data· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-15
Step 4 - Calculate and Install the Correction Weight · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-16
Step 5 – Record Applied Weights · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-17
Step 6 - Check Result (Acquire Trim Data) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-17
Step 7 Calculate the Next Trim Correction · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-17
Step 8 - Apply Additional Trim Weights · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-17
Step 9 - Check Your Results· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-17
Multiple Plane Balance Job · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-19
Trim Correction or One-Run Balance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-22
Using Data from Previous Job · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-22
General Outline for a “Trim Balance” · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-23
Special Topics· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-25
Phase· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-25
System Lag · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-26
Vibration Transducer Phase · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-28
Location of the Imbalance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-30
Placement of Trial Weight · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-31
Amount of Imbalance · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-32
Amplification Factor· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-33
How Much Trial Weight?· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-34
Vectors · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-35
Potential Problems During Balancing · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-38

viii
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page ix Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Appendix A • Accessories and Product Options


General · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-1
Cables and Adapters · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-1
Other Accessories · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-1
Customer Support · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-3
Reliability Services · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-4

Appendix B • CSI Balancing Compass™


Suggested Applications· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · B-1
Technical Specifications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · B-5

Appendix C • Clamp-on Reusable Trial Weights


Installation· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · C-1
Torquing · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · C-3
Testing· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · C-3

Appendix D • Approximate Hardware Weights

Glossary

Index

ix
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page x Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

x
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 1

Read This First

How To Use This Manual


This manual is arranged in the following manner:
• The following sections of Chapter 1 provide information that should be
read before attempting to use Fast Bal or before reading the remaining
chapters.
• Chapter 2 – explains how to use Fast Bal, including an overview of
UltraMgr/Fast Bal, a general balancing outline, and the use of Options
and other special function keys.
• Chapter 3 - explains how to transfer jobs to the PC UltraMgr from the
analyzer and how to download information from the PC to the analyzer.
• Chapter 4 – uses step-by-step procedures to explain how to perform a
typical balance job.
• Chapter 5 – contains field balancing application notes.
• Appendix A – lists accessories and product options.
• Appendix B – describes the CSI Balancing Compass™.
• Appendix C – describes CSI’s clamp-on reusable trial weights.
• Appendix D – contains tables listing calculated weights of both coarse
thread (UNC) and fine thread (UNF) bolts.

Analyzer Serialization
The loaded firmware is serialized and matches the analyzer serial number. If
your firmware and analyzer serial numbers do not match, contact CSI Customer
Support.

1-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Introduction
This manual covers information specific to the RBMCONSULTANT Pro
Advanced Fast Bal program (application). This manual assumes you are
familiar with the general hardware and operation of the analyzer. If you have
any questions or problems using your analyzer, refer to the 2130 RBMCON-
SULTANT Pro ®Single-Channel and Dual-Channel Machinery Analyzer manual
(part number 97017).

UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites

Note
Your AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager software and
Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO must have compatible soft-
ware.

Requirements
Model 2130 RBMCONSULTANT PRO firmware version v.5.3.6.0 or later.
AMS™ Suite: Machinery Health™ Manager: 4.81 (with RBMcom patch as of
4/26/04).
UltraMgr requires some planning and setup before jobs can be downloaded into
this Fast Bal program. Refer to the appropriate UltaMgr user’s manual for more
information on communicating with the PC.

1-2 Read This First


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Emphasis Paragraphs
These types of paragraphs are used throughout this manual to call attention to
the adjacent text:

Note
The note paragraph indicates special comments or instructions.

Caution!
The caution paragraph alerts you to actions that may have a major
impact on the analyzer, stored data, etc.

Warning!
The warning paragraph alerts you to actions that may have
extremely serious consequences for equipment and/or personnel.

How To Use This Manual 1-3


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Available Equipment and Options


The balance program is designed to be downloaded into CSI’s Model 2130 Ana-
lyzer (see the Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide for complete
instructions on how to install the program).
CSI has also developed a PC software program to be used in conjunction with
the balance program. This software, UltraMgr, enables you to store jobs easily.
Jobs can also be downloaded back into the balance program so that you can
quickly review all data and notes before starting a new balance job. With
UltraMgr, an old balance job performed on the same machine can be loaded into
the balance program and used as a template for the new job.
Unpack the Balance Analyzer/Equipment and compare the contents of the
package to your shipping invoice. If you find a discrepancy, call CSI Customer
Support.

Balance Case Layout (bottom)

These items are stored in the bottom half of the balance case.

1-4 Read This First


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Balance Case Layout (top)

These items are stored in the top half of the balance case.

Note
An extra piece of foam is included in the top section so items don’t
shake loose. You can remove the piece of foam to create additional
storage space. The foam fits on either side of the top section.

Available Equipment and Options 1-5


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Fast Bal Accessories


The accessories listed below are in addition to those listed in Chapter 5, Don-
gles, Cables and Adapters in the Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer user’s
manual.

Part No. Description

8BA1 Balancing Compass™


8BA25 Balance Scale and Weights
661 BNC to BNC cable, 4’ long
661-10 BNC to BNC cable, 10’ long
648 4-Channel Accel mux
639 Communications cable
6122xx BNC to 2-pin mil cable, 15’ long (red, blue, gray or black)
407 Magnetic Pick-up
404B Phototach (infrared)
401B Phototach (white light)

1-6 Read This First


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 2

Using the Balance Program

General Overview
In this section, you’ll find:
• A review of the UltraMgr and Fast Bal programs
• A Balance Job outline
• Main Menu explanations
• Detailed descriptions of key functions
• Explanations of both Advanced and Basic modes
• ALT key functions and descriptions

2-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

UltraMgr/Fast Bal Overview


The figure below shows how jobs can be moved in and out of various areas of
UltraMgr’s database and the analyzer. The four job types are defined on page
2-3.

UltraMgr/Fast Bal Overview

Note
This manual uses the terms “Station” and “Machine.” In the RBM-
ware compatible UltraMgr and in the 2130 Fast Bal program “Sta-
tion” may be called “Area” and “Machine” may be called
“Equipment.”

2-2 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Four job types are shown in the UltraMgr/Fast Bal Overview figure:
• Assigned Jobs – are jobs that are assigned to machines and/or stations.
• Unassigned Jobs – are jobs that moved from the Stored Jobs area of the
analyzer into the UltraMgr database but have not been assigned to
machines and/or stations. Using UltraMgr, you can also change a job
from Assigned to Unassigned status and move it into the Unassigned Jobs
area.
• Stored Jobs – are located in the Stored Jobs area of the analyzer. Saved
jobs and all jobs that are loaded from the UltraMgr database are placed in
the Stored Jobs area.
• Current Job – the job that is currently displayed in the working area (only
one job can be displayed at a time).

Case Studies
The following cases may help you to understand how jobs move around in the
analyzer and back and forth to UltraMgr.
When beginning a job (in the Current Job location), there are normally two
choices: start from ground zero and create, configure, and name an entirely new
job or, (if available) activate a job from the Stored Job(s) area.

Case 1
If you create and configure an entirely new job in the analyzer’s Current Job
area and you want to keep it, (using the RBMcom program on a PC), dump it to
the Unassigned Area or directly to a machine and station of UltraMgr.
Dumping the job directly to a machine and station fully integrates the job infor-
mation into the UltraMgr database. If you do not want to assign the job to a
machine and station, you can leave it in the Unassigned Area, or you can unas-
sign it from the machine and station where it was dumped.
In either case, use RBMcom to load the job back into the analyzer and from that
point, you can activate it into the Current Job area where you have full editing
capabilities.

UltraMgr/Fast Bal Overview 2-3


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
You may not be able to edit all fields, depending on the state of the
job.

Case 2
Begin with an activated job from the Stored Job area. If you change a job in the
Current Job area, that change affects the job in the stored job area.

Case 3
This case is referred to as job “cloning” and provides optimum use of the entire
system, including UltraMgr.
Load an old job performed on the same machine into Fast Bal and use it as a
template. The old job contains information on job setup, influence coefficients
from previous machine balancing, and concerns or observations (notes). Review
this information before clearing old information.
Edit the job setup and then take your first set of new readings, if desired.
With Fast Bal/UltraMgr, you can:
• Save time by using a previous job setup.
• See problems and concerns documented on previous jobs.
• New data automatically dumps to the proper location.
This is because jobs that are loaded from the Assigned area of
UltraMgr already have station and machine assignments.
• Trim balance the machine, and eliminate the need for new trial runs.
See the UltraMgr User’s manual for additional information. Here are some high-
lights:
Both the UltraMgr PC and the Analyzer act as the master and the slave
(UltraMgr/Fast Bal Overview, pg 2-1). This means that both control transac-
tions between the UltraMgr PC and the Analyzer. For more information about
communications with the Analyzer, see Chapter 3 of this manual, RBMcom and
Other Communications with the Analyzer.

2-4 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Balancing Outline

Basic Balance Job Steps

1. Define Balance Job


• Define the balance spec.
• Identify weight planes
• Identify measurement planes
• Identify measurement points
• Provide number of and approximate balance speeds
• Provide vibration sensor information
• Provide tachometer information setup

2. Reference Run
• Acquire data from the “as-is” condition for each measurement point and
speed.

3. Perform Trial Run


• Add a trial weight to the rotor in one weight plane
• Acquire data for all measurement points and speeds
• Repeat for each weight plane

4. Calculate Correction Weights

5. Perform Trim Run


• Leave or remove any trial weights and add the appropriate correction
weight
• Install the correction weight, and acquire data for the corrected condition
• Calculate trim correction
• Repeat trim runs as needed.
Find more balance technique details in Chapter 5, Application Notes On Field
Balancing.

Balancing Outline 2-5


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Program Sequence
Fast Bal leads you through each step of a routine balance procedure starting with
the job setup selection at the Main Menu.

Main Menu

The Balance Application Main Menu

The main Balancing application screen (called the Main Menu) lets you monitor
your progress throughout the balance job.

Main Menu Operations


The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created.
In this default setup, the first step in the recommended flow (Job Setup, in this
case) is highlighted.

2-6 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Unless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are displayed only at
first. Once a field is modified from the default, the program uses
the latest entry for that field.

Four Steps of the Balance Program

Four keys outline the four steps of the balance job.

A four-step operation helps you complete a balance job:


1. Job Setup – defines job setup information.
2. Acquire Data – acquires necessary readings.
3. View Balance Correction – displays balance correction (solu-
tion).
4. Trim Run – performs essential trim corrections.
[X] signifies a completed step. As you complete steps, the next recommended
step is highlighted.
Acquire Data, View Balance Correction, and Trim Run are displayed but grayed
out until you’ve completed required steps. These steps are critical to balance
jobs, and you must add complete information in sequence to access these fea-
tures. Highlight each feature using the Up/Down Arrow.
If you select an inactive feature, a popup message reminds you that the selected
step is inactive due to missing information.

Balancing Outline 2-7


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Main Menu Function Keys


Job Setup – This is the first step of the four-key operation used in completing a
balance job. When selected, you advance to the first screen under Job Setup. See
the Job Setup section on page 2-14 for more information.
Acquire Data - This is the second step of the four-key operation used in com-
pleting a balance job. When selected, you advance to the first screen under
Acquire Data. See the Acquire Data section on page 2-53 for more information.
View Corr. - This is the third step of the four-key operation to complete a bal-
ance job. When selected, you are advanced to the 1st screen under View Balance
Correction. See the View Balance Correction section on page 2-84 for more
information.
Trim Run - This is the fourth step of the four-key operation used in completing
a balance job. When selected, you advance to the 1st screen under Trim Run.
See the Trim Run section on page 2-89 for more information.
Exit Balance – Exit the balance application and return to analyzer shell.
Job Desc. – Enter job description information. From the Job Description screen,
press Enter or Back to return to the Main Menu. See Job Description Function
Keys on page 2-9 for more information about Job Desc.
Job Manager – Create a new job from scratch using default job setups, create a
new job using the job setup from an existing job, delete selected jobs from the
analyzer, transfer jobs to and from the PC, and activate a job stored in the ana-
lyzer. Enter is not active on the Job Manager screen. See Job Manager Function
Keys on page 2-10 for more information about Job Manager.

2-8 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Job Description Menu

Job Description Function Keys


Edit Job ID - Job IDs are assigned to jobs for automatic storage. However, you
can rename the Job ID, with a maximum of 10 characters. This ID is used to
store, activate, and delete jobs, and for printed reports from UltraMgr. Default
job ID’s are Job 0, Job 1, Job 2, etc. You cannot have duplicate Job ID’s.
Edit User ID - Enter a User ID for the person performing the balance job, with
a maximum of three characters. The default is blank. This option is for user
identification in printed reports from UltraMgr.
Edit Equip. Desc. – Enter a description of the machine (equipment) being bal-
anced, with a maximum of 28 characters. The default is a blank field. This
option is used for machine identification under Job Manager and on printed
reports from UltraMgr.
Edit Area - Enter a description of the station (or area) of the machine being bal-
anced, with a maximum of 32 characters. The default is a blank field. This
option is used for station identification in printed reports from UltraMgr.

Balancing Outline 2-9


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Equip. ID - Enter an ID for the machine being balanced. This is an alpha-
numeric field consisting of 1 - 10 characters. The default is a blank field. This
option is used for job and machine identification when storing, activating, and
deleting a job, as well as in printed reports from UltraMgr.
Enter Shaft Number - Enter a shaft number for the machine being balanced. This
number can be a positive numeric integer value from 1 - 99. The default is 1.
This option is used for job identification in printed reports from UltraMgr when
a machine has multiple shafts.

Job Manager Menu

Job Manager Function Keys


Create New Job – Create a new job from scratch using defaults setups. After the
job is created you can modify it to meet your needs. When selected, a new job
is created and activated. You are then automatically returned to the Main Menu.
Select/Unselect - Lets you select the highlighted job (places a check mark on the
left side of that job name), or unselect the highlighted job (removes the check
mark).
Select All - Selects all the jobs listed (places a check mark on the left side of all
job names).

2-10 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Unselect All - Unselects all the jobs listed (removes the check mark from all job
names).
Delete Selected Jobs – Deletes all selected jobs. Only active when a job has been
selected (a check mark on left side of that job name); otherwise, it is grayed out.

Caution!
Use extreme caution with the Delete Selected Job function when
the analyzer contains important collected balance data. If you say
“Yes” to a warning screen, all data is lost.

Note
If all jobs are deleted, the message “No Jobs Found” displays. At
this point, you can create a new job, transfer a job from the PC, or
change locations.

Note
Balance jobs can also be deleted from under the File Utility option.
For more information on the File Utility see the Model 2130
Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N 97017).

Connect for Transfer - Lets you transfer jobs to and from the PC. Refer to
chapter 3, RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer, and the
Model 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s Guide (P/N 97017).
Copy Job – Create a new job using the setup from the highlighted job. When
selected, you can choose to “Copy Entire Job,” “Copy Job without Trim Run
Data,” or “Copy Job Setup Only.” When selected, the new job is created and
highlighted, but not activated. To activate the job, press Activate Job.
• The “Copy Entire Job” option makes an exact copy of the job (except for
assigning a new Job ID.
• The “Copy Job without Trim Run Data” option creates a new job with a
new Job ID, all job setup information, reference run data, trial run data,
and notes.

Balancing Outline 2-11


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The “Copy Job Setup Only” option creates a new job with a new Job ID
and all job setup information. In this case, no data or notes are copied to
the new job.
Activate Job – Activates (select or recall) the highlighted job and return to the
Main Menu.
Up Job – Selects the next job on the list. Same as using the Up Arrow.
Down Job - Selects the next job down on the list. Same as using the Down
Arrow.
Change Location – Select the memory location where jobs are stored or created.
This option is only active when an external memory card is present; otherwise,
it is grayed out.

Modified Job
If information critical to the calculation of a job is changed, the following mes-
sage displays:

This warning message reminds you that changing the Job Setup can invalidate data.

2-12 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Changes to the job setup, such as Number of Planes or Measurement Points,


Measurement Point Definitions and Number of Measurement Speeds, initiate
this message. Descriptive text such as Job #, Equipment ID, Area Description,
etc., do not cause this message to appear.
If you do not want to risk loss of the current data, press Back or Reset to cancel
the operation. This way, modified fields are automatically returned to the orig-
inal values.

Balancing Outline 2-13


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Job Setup
This section describes:
• Balance Job and Tach Configuration
• Measurement Plane Setup (Standard Mode only)
• Measurement Plane Setup - Default Settings (Advanced Mode only)
• Weight Plane Setup (Advanced Mode only)
Several menu screens describe and define the current balance job. Many of the
requested inputs are not required for a basic calculation. However, these fields
are used in graphic plots and for re-creations of the job setup.
Fast Bal may seem to require an unusual amount of setup information. However,
the time required for input is minimal.
You can simplify the process by using default setups, or using RBMcom to load
previous Job Setup Information of the same (or similar) machines.
Storing the setup information and balance data can reduce the time required for
repeat balance jobs, because you can perform one-run trim balances.

2-14 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Job Setup from the Main Menu to define the job setup parameters (such
as tachometer location, sensor location, and measurement plane setup). You
must complete this step to complete a balance job. The application defaults to a
predefined setup, but you can modify the setup to fit your needs.

Example Machine with Two Measurement Planes and Two Weight Planes

Job Setup 2-15


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Unless otherwise noted, any defaults listed are only used at first.
Once you modify a field, the program defaults to the last entry for
that field.

Note
Default setups are available and provide automatic configuration
according to the number of measurement planes and measurement
points defined for the job. See the Measurement Plane Setup -
Default Settings section on page 2-45 for more information.

Note
After completing any step, the program automatically advances.

Job Setup Operation


There are three basic sections to setting up the balance job:
1. Define the balance job and tachometer parameters.
2. Prepare the balance measurement planes and points.
3. Prepare the balance weight planes.

Caution!
The information you supply to this program is critical, as the pro-
gram needs it to operate correctly. If you modify these entries after
starting data acquisition, you may invalidate the balance solution
unless all of the data is replaced. Proceed with caution! You cannot
change the number of measurement speeds or the speeds being
used without repeating all reference and trial runs. The number of
measurement planes, weight planes, and measurement points may
be changed if you are careful. If you reduce the designated num-
bers for these entries, you automatically remove the highest num-
bered planes or points. You receive a warning message when any
entry is modified.

2-16 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Balance Job and Tach Configuration


The Advanced or Basic balance mode screen displays, depending on your selec-
tion.

Balance Job and Tach Configuration Operation


The application defaults to a predefined setup when a new job is created.

Note
Unless otherwise noted, the default settings are only used at first.
Once you modify a field, the program defaults to the last entry for
that field.

Job Setup 2-17


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Basic and Advanced Job Setup

Job Setup Basic Mode

Job Setup Advanced Mode

2-18 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Use the information on the screen to verify that the supplied infor-
mation is accurate by comparing it to the machine.

Balance Job and Tach Configuration Function Keys


Weight Planes - Only active in Advanced Balance Mode. Define the number of
weight planes for the job by selecting a number between one and four, (default
is two).
You must define a measurement plane for each weight plane. Therefore, if you
select more weight planes than there are defined measurement planes, the
number of measurement planes increases automatically. For example, if one
measurement plane is defined for a job, but two weight planes are selected, a
second measurement plane is added.

Note
If required, the number of measurement planes and points automat-
ically adjust accordingly.

Toggle Config. / Meas. Planes – Function depends on the selected balance


mode. Toggle Configuration displays if the balance mode is set to Basic; Mea-
surement Planes displays if the balance mode is set to Advanced.

Basic Mode Only


Define the number of weight planes and sensors for the job by selecting
between:
(a) 1 Plane, 1 Sensor
(b) 1 Plane, 2 Sensors (default)
(c) 2 Planes, 2 Sensors
These point IDs automatically define the measurement points in the job:
• PT1 (Point #1), if only one point is defined for the job. In this case, only
one weight plane can be defined for the job.
• PT1 (Point #1) and PT2 (Point #2), if two points and one weight plane are
defined for the job.

Job Setup 2-19


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• PT1 (Point #1) and PT2 (Point #2), if two points and two weight planes
are defined for the job. A measurement plane must exist for each weight
plane, and each measurement plane must contain at least one measure-
ment point (PT1 in Measurement Plane #1 and PT2 in Measurement
Plane #2).

Note
For each measurement point defined a symbol (such as a square, a
circle, or an “X”) represents each point. The symbol(s) display on
graphs or anyplace needed to help locate the point it represents.
These default symbols identify each defined measurement point
(two maximum) in each defined measurement plane:

(a) The 1st point - a square “†”


(b) The 2nd point - a circle “”

Note
You can use horizontal or vertical orientation. You get the best
results by taking measurements at both bearings. For special,
single plane circumstances, place both sensors at one bearing.

Advanced Mode Only


Define how many measurement planes there are for the job. You can choose
from one to eight measurement planes for a job, (default is two).

Note
Measurement planes are labeled for menu displays and informa-
tion that is printed or transferred to the PC. The first plane is “Mea-
surement Plane 1,” the second plane is “Measurement Plane 2,”
and additional planes are Measurement Planes 3-8.

2-20 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Each Measurement Plane must have at least one measurement
point. When the number of Measurement Planes selected is greater
than the number of points defined, the number of points increases
automatically to the minimum number of points required for the
number of planes defined. For example, if two points are defined
for the job and three measurement planes are selected, the number
of points increases to three (one per plane).

Note
You must define a Measurement Plane for each weight plane. The
program forces you to correct this if the number of measurement
planes is less than the defined number of Weight Planes.

Meas. – Only active in Advanced Balance Mode. Define the number of mea-
surement points for the job by selecting a number between one to eight, (default
is four with two in Plane 1 and two in Plane 2). The following point IDs define
the measurement points in the job:
Plane 1: the default measurement point ID labeled IBH (Inboard
Horizontal) for the first point, IBV (Inboard Vertical) for the second
point, and IBA (Inboard Axial) for the third point.
Plane 2: the default measurement point ID labeled OBH (Outboard
Horizontal) for the first point, OBV (Outboard Vertical) for the
second point, and OBA (Outboard Axial) for the third point.
Plane 3: the default measurement point ID labeled P3H (Horizontal
Point in the third Plane) for the first point, P3V (Vertical Point in
the third Plane) for the second point, and P3A (Axial Point in the
third Plane) for the third point.
Plane 4: the default measurement point ID labeled P4H (Horizontal
Point in the fourth Plane) for the first point, P4V (Vertical Point in
the fourth Plane) for the second point, and P4A (Axial Point in the
fourth Plane) for the third point.

Job Setup 2-21


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Plane 5: the default measurement point ID labeled P5H (Horizontal


Point in the fifth Plane) for the first point, P5V (Vertical Point in the
fifth Plane) for the second point, and P5A (Axial Point in the fifth
Plane) for the third point.
Plane 6: the default measurement point ID labeled P6H (Horizontal
Point in the sixth Plane) for the first point, P6V (Vertical Point in
the sixth Plane) for the second point, and P6A (Axial Point in the
sixth Plane) for the third point.
Plane 7: the default measurement point ID labeled P7H (Horizontal
Point in the seventh Plane) for the first point and P7V (Vertical
Point in the seventh Plane) for the second point.

Note
With seven measurement planes defined, no more than two points
can be defined for the seventh plane.

Plane 8: the default measurement point ID labeled P8H (Horizontal


Point in the eighth Plane) for the first point.

Note
With eight measurement planes defined, no more than one point
can be defined for the eighth plane.

• Each Measurement Plane may have a maximum of three points. When


the number of selected points is greater than three times the number of
defined Measurement Planes, an error message warns this is an invalid
selection and the selection is rejected.
• Each Measurement Plane must have at least one point. Therefore, when
the number of points selected is less than the number of defined Measure-
ment Planes, an error message warns this is an invalid selection and the
selection is rejected.
The default setup distributes the points equally among the defined measurement
planes.

2-22 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

For example, if seven points and three planes were defined for a job, Plane1 con-
tains three points, Plane2 two points, and Plane3 two points. If eight points and
three planes are defined for a job, Plane1 contains three points, Plane2 three
points, and Plane3 two points.
If a point is added and one of the default ID’s is in use, the next available default
ID is assigned. For example, OB1, IB1, P31, P41, and so on.

Note
Add and delete Measurement Points from the Measurement Plane
Setup screens. As the number of points defined for the measure-
ment plane increase or decrease, the number of points defined for
the job automatically adjusts.

Note
The number of measurement points defined, then multiplied by the
number of measurement speeds can not exceed 24.

Meas. Plane Setup - Active in Advanced Balance Mode, after completing Job
Setup. Maneuver quickly through Job Setup by selecting the first measurement
plane setup screen.
Weight Plane Setup - Active in Advanced Balance Mode, after completing Job
Setup. Maneuver quickly through Job Setup using this feature by selecting the
first weight plane setup screen.

Job Setup 2-23


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Balance Mode - Define whether the balance job is an Advanced or Basic job.
With the basic setup, less setup and effort is required to define the balance job.
With the advanced setup, more setup options assist you in balancing machinery
with more variables.

This warning message alerts you before you change the Balance Mode

Additional Notes About Basic Balance Mode


You can only use a limited number of features in Basic Balance Mode. This
includes:
• You are limited to 2 planes, 2 sensors at one speed.
• You cannot split weights automatically for discrete weight planes.
• You cannot customize measurement point labels or identify sensor
positions.
• You cannot use calculator modes for estimating trial weights or Amplifi-
cation Factor/System Lag.
• No data checking is performed after acquiring reference run data.
• Sensor setup is limited. Runout data cannot be subtracted, and auto and
external mux options are unavailable, bandwidth filters cannot be
adjusted.

2-24 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• You cannot enter weight units and weight placement radius.

Note
Unless noted, all information in this manual pertains to both the
Basic and Advanced Modes. Any information specific to one mode
is noted.

Enter Balance Spec. – Define the vibration level (balance spec) to be used as a
tolerance check. The balance spec is the vibration magnitude, which the equip-
ment should run below when balanced satisfactorily. The units of this number
are the same as those specified for the sensor. This number can be a positive dec-
imal number from 0.001 – 10,000. The default is 1.000.
Select Weight Units - Only active in Advanced Balance Mode. You do not have
to specify a weight unit, but you can define the trial and trim weight units for the
entire job. The default weight units are “unitless”, but you can also label weight
units as ounces (oz.), grams (gm), pounds (lb.), kilograms (kg), or grains, (gr.).
Find this unit displayed throughout the program where a weight displays.

Note
This option is only a reference for UltraBal reports or future setups.
It does not calculate the balance correction.

Job Setup 2-25


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Tach Configuration
Tach Config. – Displays the Tach Options Configuration screen (shown below)
where you can define tach configuration information.

Tach Options Configuration Subscreen

Tach Configuration Function Keys


Enter Tach Angle – Enter the position of the tachometer pickup (in degrees) rel-
ative to Top-Dead-Center (TDC). Identifies placement of the tachometer refer-
ence pulse for future setup, on graphs (position noted by a “T”), and in some
special calculations performed under the Calculator Mode. The tach location is
measured opposite to shaft rotation and is defined two ways, depending on the
selected balance mode:
Basic Mode – Defines the tach location as Top, Bottom, Left, or
Right. The default is Top.

Note
Left and Right are independent of the rotational direction and are
defined as if you were facing the rotor.

2-26 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Advanced Mode – defines the tach location as a positive number


from 0-359. This field's units are in degrees. The default is 0o.

Note
The location of the tach is not the angular location of the tachom-
eter sensor relative to the rotor. It is the angular location of the
reflective tape when the tach sees it relative to Top-Dead-Center
(TDC).

Note
Tach location is used for future setup, on graphical displays, and in
some special calculations performed under the Calculator Mode
(such as Estimating Trial Weight). The tach location does not cal-
culate the balance correction.

Toggle Direction Rotation- Specify the direction of rotation as Clockwise (CW)


or Counter-Clockwise (CCW). This is used as the default orientation for all
graphs within the job. The default is CCW.
Press Enter or Back to return to the Balance Job and Tach Configuration screen.

Job Setup 2-27


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Tachometer Setup
Configure the tachometer setup parameters with Tachometer Setup.

The Tachometer Setup screen in Bypass mode.

Pseudo Tach – Press Pseudo Tach to switch the Pseudo Tach between enabled
and disabled.
For the Balance program, the Pseudo Tach must be disabled. If the Pseudo Tach
is enabled, you will get a message telling you to disable it and you cannot
acquire any balance data. When the pseudo tach is disabled, a standard 1x tach
is produced.
Set Trigger Level – Opens a dialog box so that you can enter the trigger voltage
for the tachometer pulse.
Set Edge Delay – Opens a dialog box so you can enter the time in seconds to
delay between tachometer pulses. This helps prevent double triggering.
Show RPM – Press Show RPM to display the Last RPM and the Last Time.

2-28 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Hide RPM – Press Hide RPM to remove the RPM and Time features from your
screen.
Tach Power – Toggle the tachometer’s power on and off.

Note
The CSI Model 404A and 404B tachometers require power ON if
directly connected to the 2130 analyzer. If you connect your tach
to the 404P external tach power supply, power can be set to OFF.

Set Defaults – Returns you to the default tachometer settings for your analyzer.

Job Setup 2-29


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Speed Setup
Speed Setup - Only active in Advanced balance mode. Use this feature to define
balance speed (RPM) information.

Only one speed is defined for this job.

2-30 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Six speeds are defined for this job.

Measurement Speeds Function Keys


Delta RPM - Set the delta RPM (maximum RPM deviation) from 0-500. Enter
zero (0) to disable this option.
For the Delta RPM to be functional, its value must be non-zero, and there must
be a defined speed value for the equipment. For example, if the entered machine
speed for RPM1 is 1800 RPM and Delta RPM is 50, the valid range for the
machine running speed is 1750-1850 RPM.
Valid vibration readings occur when the machine running speed is between
1750-1850 RPM. Invalid readings occur when the machine has a running speed
outside the range 1750-1850 RPM. The invalid readings are not used in the com-
putation of averaged magnitude and phase readings during data collection.
Machine RPM is updated and displayed during data acquisition. Only the acqui-
sition of the magnitude and phase readings are stopped when the machine speed
is outside the valid RPM region defined.
Enter Speed #1 - Define the first RPM as a valid from 0 - 100,000. Enter zero
(0) and “UNKNOWN” displays for the speed.

Job Setup 2-31


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Speed is expressed in revolutions per minute (RPM). Use this
value as a reference for future setup. You can also use it as the base-
line speed for applying the delta RPM criteria to determine data
validity. If there are multiple speeds, an input number is necessary
for each balance speed to assist you in identifying the speed data.
Speed is not used to calculate the balance correction.

Enter Speed #2 – Define, if needed, the second RPM as a value from 0 -


100,000. Enter zero (0) and “UNKNOWN” displays for the speed.
Enter Speed #3 - Define, if needed, the third RPM as a value from 0 - 100,000.
Enter zero (0) and “UNKNOWN” displays for the speed.
Number of Speeds - Enter the number of measurement speeds for the job as a
number from 1-6. The default is one.
The maximum number of defined points multiplied by the number of selected
speeds is 24. Therefore, whenever the number of defined points multiplied by
the number of selected speeds exceeds 24, you receive an error message stating
that this is an invalid selection and this selection is rejected.
Enter Speed #4 – Define, if needed, the fourth RPM as a value from 0 - 100,000.
Enter zero (0) and “UNKNOWN” displays for the speed.
Enter Speed #5 – Define, if needed, the fifth RPM as a value from 0 - 100,000.
Enter zero (0) and “UNKNOWN” displays for the speed.
Enter Speed #6 –Define, if needed, the 6th RPM as a value from 0 - 100,000.
Enter zero (0) and “UNKNOWN” displays for the speed.
Press Enter or Back to return to the Balance Job and Tach Configuration screen.

2-32 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Sensor Setup
Sensor Setup - Active in Basic Balance Mode on the job setup screen. Displays
the Sensor Setup so you can define the sensor setup information.

Balance Job Sensor Setup screen

Sensor Setup Function Keys


Sensor Type - Define the type of sensor used to acquire data. Select Accelerom-
eter, Velocity, Displacement, or Non-Standard. The same sensor type is used on
all measurement points. Accelerometer is the default setting.
Select Display Units - Also called convert-to-units. Choose Acceleration (G's,
English or Metric units), Velocity (in/sec, English units or mm/sec, Metric
units), or Displacement (mils, English units or microns, Metric units). The
default is displacement unless the Sensor Type is Non-Standard. The default set-
ting for Non-Standard is “Sensor Units”. This information is used for computa-
tion and display.
Data Units - Choose RMS, Peak, or Peak-Peak for Sensor Unit displays. If dis-
play units are set to Acceleration the default is RMS, Velocity the default is
Peak, and Displacement the default is Peak-Peak. This information is used for
computation and display.

Job Setup 2-33


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If Sensor Type is Non-Standard, this option displays “Standard” by default and


you can edit this term. Enter a maximum of 8 characters to define this field.
Mux Enabled - Toggle the mux adapter on and off.
On - Indicates that a mux adapter controls software that switches
between channels when using a Model 648 multiplexer. You must
accept each measurement reading manually.

Note
If the mux is enabled, you can only use channel 1 if one sensor is
defined, channels 1 and 2 if 1 plane 2 sensors are defined and chan-
nels 1 and 3 if 2 planes, 2 sensors are defined.

Off - a mux adapter is not used.


Auto - The mux adapter controls software switching between chan-
nels when you are using a Model 648 multiplexer. After the first
reading is started, the program automatically acquires and accepts
each measurement reading when the reading is in the good range
for three consecutive averages (stable) and advances to the next
step.
External - Indicates an external multiplexer is being used. You must
accept each measurement reading manually.
Toggle Sensor Power - On indicates that power is provided by the analyzer. Off
indicates that power is provided by an external source.
Enter Sensitivity - Enter the number of volts output per unit of measure in order
to define a sensor's sensitivity. You can enter a numeric value from 0.0001 - 20.
The default is 0.10.

Note
The sensor setup screen for the Basic Mode is similar to the sensor
setup screen for the Advanced Mode, but with fewer options.

Press Enter or Back to return to the Balance Job and Tach Configuration screen.

2-34 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Advanced Balance Mode: Press Enter to accept the screen and advance to the
Measurement Plane Setup screen. Press any active function key to accept this
screen and explore extra functions available in Advanced Balance Mode.
Basic Balance Mode: Press Enter to accept the screen and advance to the Main
Menu. Press any active function key to accept this screen and explore extra
functions available in Basic Balance Mode.

Measurement Plane Setup


Measurement Plane Setup is the second option in Job Setup in Advanced Bal-
ance Mode.
Define one measurement plane at a time. A measurement plane is an area of a
machine where measurements are made, such as at the inboard or outboard
bearing.
Each measurement plane may have up to three measurement sensors defined.
No more than one sensor can be axial (measures vibration parallel to the shaft),
but all three may be defined as radial (measures vibration perpendicular to the
shaft).
After defining all sensors for a measurement plane, compare the display to the
machine to verify your setup information is correct.
The positions of the sensors are important to the accuracy of special data checks,
also known as Watchdog, which are performed after the reference run data is
acquired and in some special calculations (such as Estimate Trial Weights and
for system lag calculations) performed under the Calculator Mode.

Job Setup 2-35


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Example machine showing Measurement Plane 1 as defined below.

Measurement Plane 1

Measurement Plane Setup Operation


The header, displayed in the upper center section of the screen, informs you
which plane displays and how many planes there are defined for the job.
Measurement plane setup information displays just underneath the header. As
shown below, the first point listed (IBH in this case) is highlighted.
• If more than one point is defined for the plane, the Up/Down Arrow can
be used to select another point to edit.
• Except for the symbol, you can edit any field defined for the highlighted
point.
• Three points per plane are permitted.
• At least one point must exist on any defined plane.
• Until the maximum number of points is defined for the plane, a point can
be added using Add MPT.
• Except for the last point, any highlighted point can be deleted using
Delete MPT.
• The CH (Channel) column is not displayed when the Model 648 or Ext
mux is inactive.
• Sensor setup information is displayed in the lower section.

2-36 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

Measurement Plane Setup screen

A diagram displays in the upper left-hand section of the screen. The tach (T)
location defined for the job, Top-Dead-Center (TDC), and the measurement
point symbol for points defined for the plane are displayed as part of the plot.
Also, the direction of rotation (represented by an arrow pointing in the direction
of rotation) displays next to the plot.

Note
This menu is unavailable when Balance Mode is set to Basic.

Measurement Plane Setup Function Keys


Job Setup Config. – Only available after completing Job Setup. Brings you to
the Balance Job and Tach Configuration screen.

Job Setup 2-37


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Meas. Plane - Only available after completing Job Setup. Brings you to
the next measurement plane (if another plane is defined for the job). If you are
on the last plane, it takes you to the first defined plane.
Setup Weight Plane – Only available after completing Job Setup. Brings you to
the 1st weight plane setup screen defined for the job.
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggles the direction of rotation for the current dia-
gram for your convenience.

Note
This option does not change Tach Options Configuration defini-
tions.

Sensor Setup - Displays the Sensor Setup screen, allowing you to define the
sensor setup information.

Balance Job Sensor Setup screen

Sensor Setup Function Keys


Sensor Type - Define the type of sensor used to acquire data. Select Accelerom-
eter, Velocity, Displacement, or Non-Standard. The same sensor type is used on
all measurement points. Accelerometer is the default setting.

2-38 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Display Units - Also called convert-to-units. Choose Acceleration (G's,


English or Metric units), Velocity (in/sec, English units or mm/sec, Metric
units), or Displacement (mils, English units or microns, Metric units). The
default is displacement unless the Sensor Type is Non-Standard. The default set-
ting for Non-Standard is “Sensor Units.” This information is used for computa-
tion and display.
Data Units - Choose RMS, Peak, or Peak-Peak for Sensor Unit displays. If dis-
play units are set to Acceleration, the default is RMS; Velocity, the default is
Peak; and Displacement, the default is Peak-Peak. This information is used for
computation and display.
If Sensor Type is Non-Standard, this option displays “Standard” by default. You
can edit this term. Enter no more than eight characters to define this field.
Mux Enabled - Toggle the mux adapter on and off.
On - Indicates that a mux adapter controls software that switches
between channels when using a Model 648 multiplexer. You must
accept each measurement reading manually.

Note
If the mux is enabled, you can only use channels 1-4, but you can
define up to eight points for the job. Therefore, if more than four
points are defined, points have to share channel numbers and you
have to switch sensors manually on the appropriate channels.
When doing this, please be careful not to confuse your readings.

Off - a mux adapter is not used.


Auto - The mux adapter controls software that switches between
channels when you are using a Model 648 multiplexer. After the
first reading starts, the program automatically acquires and accepts
each measurement reading when the reading is in the good range
for three consecutive averages (stable) and advances to the next
step.

Note
You can override and force the analyzer to accept the reading at
any time by pressing either Enter or Accept Data.

Job Setup 2-39


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
You can only define four points or less for the job when the mux is
set to Auto. If you try to set the mux to Auto with more than four
points defined, a warning message displays.

External - Indicates an external multiplexer (not the Model 648) is


being used. You must accept each measurement reading manually.

Note
When the mux is set to External, a maximum of eight channels can
be defined.

Toggle Sensor Power - On: The analyzer provides power. Off: Power is pro-
vided by an external source.
Enter Sensitivity - Enter the number of volts output per unit of measure in order
to define a sensor's sensitivity. You can enter a numeric value from 0.0001 - 20.
The default is 0.10.
Enter Bandwidth - Define the bandwidth of the tracking filter used to attenuate
all frequency components except the desired peak. This field accepts a positive
numeric decimal value from 0.04 - 0.5. The default is 0.1 (10%).
The bandwidth of the filter is the frequency of the machine's turning speed peak
multiplied by the bandwidth parameter. For example, if the machine turning
speed is 1800 RPM and the bandwidth parameter is 0.10, the filter bandwidth is
180 RPM or +/- 90 RPM. Therefore, frequency components are not attenuated
between 1710–1890 RPM.
A more narrow filter (lower numerical value) attenuates frequency components
that are close to the machine's turning speed; however, more time is needed for
the analyzer to take a measurement.
Toggle Subtract Runout - Turn this option on if Runout is subtracted for the
defined sensor. The default is no, which means that Runout is not subtracted
from the defined sensor.

2-40 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Runout corrections are usually made when displacement probes have collected
balance data (such as during a slow roll of the rotor). The probes can gather data
from mechanical irregularities in the shaft as vibration, which must be sub-
tracted out.
If runout is subtracted, you need an additional set of readings before taking the
reference run readings.
The required information, default settings, and method for acquiring the read-
ings for this option is the same as defined for the reference run readings. How-
ever, only one set of readings are acquired, as this option is independent of the
number of machine speeds defined for the job.
When runout is subtracted, you can view any reading with and without the
runout information.

Note
The sensor setup screen in Advanced and Basic Balance Modes are
similar, but Advanced mode has more options.

Press Enter or Back to return to the Measurement Plane Setup screen.


Add MPT - Add a measurement point to the end of the list of measurement
points displayed (three points maximum can exist in a plane).
When selected, any defaults are displayed and the edit mode is activated for the
new point. You can edit the ID if desired, using a maximum of three (3) charac-
ters
A symbol, such as a small square, circle or “X,” is assigned to each defined mea-
surement point. The symbols identify point locations on graphs. The following
default symbols identify each measurement point defined (3 max) in a measure-
ment plane:
(a) The 1st point (such as IBH, OBH, P3H, P4H) - a square “†”
(b) The 2nd point (such as IBV, OBV, P3V, P4V) - a circle “O”
(c) The 3rd point (such as IBA, OBA, P3A, P4A) - an “X”

Job Setup 2-41


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
As the number of points defined for the measurement plane
increase, the number of points displayed on the Balance Job &
Tach Configuration screen increase.

Delete Measurement Point - The selected (highlighted) point is removed from


the list of points. At least one point must be defined per plane; therefore, you
cannot delete the last defined point for the plane.

Note
As the number of points defined for the measurement plane
decrease, the number of points displayed on the Balance Job &
Tach Configuration screen decrease.

Edit MPT ID – Edit the selected (highlighted) measurement point ID. Enter 1-
3 characters. This ID identifies the measurement point for data acquisition,
reports, and future setups. Duplicate IDs are not allowed.
Enter MPT Angle – Edit the selected (highlighted) measurement point angle (in
degrees) relative to Top-Dead-Center (TDC). It is measured opposite to shaft
rotation. It identifies placement of the measurement point’s sensor for future
setup, on graphs, and in some special calculations performed under the Calcu-
lator Mode. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0-359. This
field's units are degrees.
The following three default angles identify the location of each defined mea-
surement point (3 max) in a measurement plane:
(a) The 1st point (such as IBH, OBH, P3H, P4H) - 270 degrees
(b) The 2nd point (such as IBV, OBV, P3V, P4V) - 0 degrees
(c) The 3rd point (such as IBA, OBA, P3A, P4A) - 0 degrees

2-42 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
As previously stated, the measurement point location is used for
future setups, on graphs, and in some special calculations per-
formed under the Calculator Mode (such as Estimating Trial
Weight). The measurement point location does not calculate bal-
ance correction.

Enter MPT Channel - Only active if either the Model 648 4-channel mux is
enabled (On or Auto) or an external mux is defined for the job.
Edit the selected measurement point mux channel when this key is active. This
is a numeric integer field, where you can enter a number between 1-4 or 1-8,
depending on the mux option definition.
If the Model 648 4-channel mux is enabled, use the following default channel
numbers to identify the location of each measurement point:
(a) The 1st point (such as IBH) - Ch1
(b) The 2nd point (such as IBV) - Ch2
(c) The 3rd point (such as OBH) - Ch3
(d) The 4th point (such as OBV) - Ch4
When the mux is set to On, you can define more than four points for the job.
However, you can only use channels 1-4, so you must assign more than one
point per channel. Be careful when doing this, to avoid acquiring the wrong
readings on the wrong point. Acquiring the wrong data on the wrong point could
make your balance solution invalid.
When the mux is set to Auto, no more than four measurement points can be
defined for the job.

Job Setup 2-43


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If the External mux is enabled, use the following default channel numbers to
identify the location of each measurement point:
a ···· The 1st point - Ch1
b ···· The 2nd point - Ch2
c ···· The 3rd point - Ch3
d ···· The 4th point - Ch4
e ···· The 5th point - Ch5
f ····· The 6th point - Ch6
g ···· The 7th point - Ch7
h ···· The 8th point - Ch8
You can assign the same channel number to more than one point. Be careful
when doing this, to avoid acquiring the wrong readings on the wrong point.
Acquiring the wrong data on the wrong point could make your balance solution
invalid.
When you increase the number of points defined for a job, the next available
channel number is assigned by default. When you perform this operation, be
sure to verify the channel numbers are defined properly for your Balance Job
and modify them as needed.
When the mux option is set to Off, this key is inactive, and the CH (Channel)
column is not displayed.
MPT Rad/ Ax – Specify radial (RAD) or axial (AX) for the sensor orientation
of the highlighted measurement point.
• No more than one axial measurement point can be defined in each mea-
surement plane.
• The default for the first two measurement points defined in each mea-
surement plane is radial.

2-44 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or the appropriate function key to accept this screen and continue to
the next. If more Measurement Planes are defined for the job, press Enter to
advance the program to the next measurement plane (as shown below).

Measurement Plane 2 Setup screen

Measurement Plane Setup - Default Settings

Default Settings (Advanced Mode Only)


To make Job Definition easier and to standardize procedures, measurement
points are configured automatically to default settings, depending on the
number of measurement planes and measurement points specified.

Job Setup 2-45


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

These defaults do not affect changes to an existing job unless all data and entries
are cleared first.

OB OB
Point ID IBH IBV P1H P2H P3H P4H
H V
Meas Planes 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4
Angle TDC 270 0 270 0 270 270 270 270
Channel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
# Meas # Meas
Planes Points
1 1
X
1 2 X X
2 2 X X
2 3 X X X
2 4 X X X X
3 3 X X X
4 4 X X X X

If you use these defaults as the standard setup for undefined jobs, it reduces the
number of inputs you must modify.
After entering the necessary inputs, press Enter to move to the define the Weight
Plane Setup screens.

Weight Plane Setup


A weight plane is one area of a machine where weight adjustments are made.
Press Enter from the last measurement plane setup screen to display the first
weight plane setup screen in Advanced Balance Mode.
Define one weight plane at a time. For each weight plane, at least one measure-
ment plane must also be defined. No more than four weight planes can be
defined for a job.

2-46 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

After defining each weight plane, compare the screen display to the machine to
verify your setup information, especially if the weight plane is defined with dis-
crete weight placement positions.

Weight Plane Setup Operation


1.····The header, displayed in the upper center section of the screen, informs
you which plane displays and how many planes are defined for the job.
2.····Weight plane setup information displays just underneath the header.
3.····The weight placement radius displays at the bottom left side of the menu.
4.····A diagram displays in the center left-hand section of the screen. The tach
(T) location defined for the job and Top-Dead-Center (TDC) are
displayed as part of the plot. Also, the direction of rotation (represented
by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) displays next to the plot.

Note
Compare the screen to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

Weight Plane 1 setup screen

Job Setup 2-47


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Weight Plane Setup Function Keys


Job Setup Config. – Takes you to the Balance Job & Tach Configuration screen.
This option is only available after you complete Job Setup.
Meas. Plane Setup - Takes you to the first measurement plane setup screen
defined for the job. This option is only available after you complete Job Setup.
Select Weight Plane – Takes you to the next weight plane (if another plane has
been defined for the job). From the last plane, press this key to return to the first
plane. This option is only available after you complete Job Setup.
Toggle Direction Rotation- Toggles the direction of rotation for the current
graph.

Note
This option does not change the definitions for Tach Options
Setup.

Enter Weight Radius - Define the trial and trim weight placement radius from
0.00 – 650 inches (English units) or 0.00 – 1651 centimeters (metric units) for
the plane. This is a positive numeric decimal field. Enter zero (0) to display
“UNKNOWN” for the radius. The default is 0 (UNKNOWN).

Note
Use this option throughout the job as a reference, in reports from
UltraMgr, and for future setups only. It is not used to calculate the
balance correction.

2-48 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Toggle Discrete Contin. – Define whether the plane setup is for continuous or
discrete weight locations. The default for each weight plane is continuous.

Weight plane #1 is toggled to discrete weight position setup for illustration purposes

A correction weight plane can be either a continuous weight plane (weights can
be placed at any position on the rotor) or a discrete weight plane (weights can
only be placed at specific positions on the rotor - such as fan blades or pre-
drilled holes for balance weights).
Both plane types can be defined in the same balance job. For a continuous
weight plane, no additional information is required.
Whenever any information (such as trial weight, correction results, etc.) dis-
plays, each plane is labeled continuous or discrete.
When defining a discrete weight plane, the number of each defined position (in
the direction and angular position defined) displays on an XY diagram. This
helps you with Job Setup and orientation.

Job Setup 2-49


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
No more than 12 weight placement positions are displayed on the
screen at one time because of the analyzer’s screen resolution.
When more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, adjustments
necessary to display numbers around the plot are made to assist
you with the setup and orientation.

Enter Number (of Weight) Positions – Only displayed if Weight Positions is


defined as discrete. Enter a positive numeric integer value from 3 - 100. The
default is 8.
The balance application assumes that every discrete weight position is equally
spaced apart from each other and numbered accordingly.

End view of Example Rotor for Weight Plane #1

All program references to these positions for weight locations are position num-
bers that follow the “at” symbol (@).
Enter 1st Pos. Angle – Displayed only if Weight Position is discrete. Enter a pos-
itive numeric integer value from 0 - 359. The units of this option are degrees.
The default has the first position located at the leading edge of the tape (0o).
The angular position of the first weight location is measured in the opposite
direction of rotation starting from the leading edge of the reference mark (such
as the leading edge of the reflective tape or keyway).

2-50 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Toggle Number Rotation– Not displayed unless Weight Positions is defined as


discrete. This is a toggle field where a filled in circle represents yes/on and an
unfilled circle represents no/off.
This option defines the direction in which the positions are numbered. You can
set the position numbers to increase with the direction of rotation or against the
direction of rotation.
The default setting has the numbers increasing in the opposite direction of rota-
tion starting from the leading edge of the reference mark.
Copy Plane Setup – Not displayed unless the Weight Positions are defined as
discrete and another plane defined for the job is to be displayed next.
In other words, in the example for this section, there are only two planes defined
for the job with the second plane defined as discrete; therefore, Copy Plane
Setup does not display. If a third plane is defined for the job, Copy Plane Setup
displays.
When selected, this option defines the next plane setup to be exactly like the cur-
rent plane.
Press Enter to accept this screen and advance to the next step in the procedure.
If more Weight Planes are defined for the job, press Enter to advance the pro-
gram to the next weight plane (as shown below).

Weight Plane 2 setup screen

Job Setup 2-51


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If no more Weight Planes are defined for the job, press Enter to advance the pro-
gram to the Main Menu where the [X] indicates Job Setup is complete.

Balance Application Main Menu

Once Job Setup is complete, you are ready to acquire the vibration readings and
calculate the balance correction.

2-52 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquiring Balance Data


Use Acquire Data to gather the data you need to calculate balance corrections.
This is the second of four required steps to complete a balance job. You must
complete Job Setup before you can access Acquire Data.
This section describes:
• Select Measurement
• Trial Run Weight Setup
• Trial Run Weight Setup - Alternative Method For Editing/Entering Data
• Select Measurement Speed
• Select Measurement Point
• Acquiring Readings
• Acquiring Data - Reference Run Balancing Watchdog (Advanced Mode
only)
• Completion of Measurement Runs

Note
Unless otherwise indicated, listed defaults only display initially.
Once any field is modified, the program displays the last entry for
that field.

Note
After a step is complete, the program advances automatically.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-53


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquire Data Operation


There are seven steps to acquire balance job data.
1·····Select the measurement type.
2·····Define the trial weight parameters, if the measurement type is a trial run.
3·····Select the measurement speed, if more than one speed is defined for the
job.
4·····Select the measurement point.
5·····Acquire the data.
6·····Repeat steps 1-5 (as needed) until all data is acquired.
7·····Continue to the next step.

If active, function keys perform the associated step or option, and advance the
program to the next screen for that step or option.

2-54 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Measurement
Press Acquire Data or press Enter when Acquire Data is highlighted to display
the Select Measurement feature. In this section, pick the measurement you need
(such as Runout, Reference Run, or Trial Run #1) to acquire data readings.

Select Measurement Operation


The required measurements, as defined for the job, display and highlight the
next step (Reference Run in this case). Use the figure on page 2-56 as an
example. The defined balance job has 2-planes and has not subtracted runout.
An [X] marks each complete step. As you complete each step, the next step is
highlighted.

Note
The program follows a recommended sequence, but you can select
and acquire data on any measurement run.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-55


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

There is a check off sheet for Select Measurement in the center of the screen.

Reference Run, Trial Run 1, and Trial Run 2 only defined for job

All measurements for this job are defined

2-56 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Measurement Function Keys


Acquire Runout Data– This feature only displays when defined. If Runout is
active, you can acquire runout data. Choose from a list of multiple defined mea-
surement points, if necessary.
Subtract runout is acquired during a slow roll of the rotor, when displacement
sensors are being used to collect balance data. A slow roll means that the rotor
rotates so slowly that readings from the sensors only indicate mechanical irreg-
ularities on the rotor surface, not vibration.

Note
Compare the reading with runout subtracted to the balance spec,
not the uncompensated reading. The reading with runout sub-
tracted helps to determine the balance condition of the machine.

Acquire Ref. Run Data- Acquire reference (as is) run data with this feature. Ref-
erence Run data must be compared to Trial Run data, so this feature is always a
Select Measurement option. Choose from a list of multiple defined measure-
ment points, if necessary. Acquire reference run data before placing or removing
trial weights on the rotor.
Acquire Trial Run #1 Data- Acquire data for the first trial run. See Trial Run 1,
2, 3, 4 section on page 2-58 for more information.
Acquire Trial Run #2 Data- Acquire data for the second trial run. This feature is
only available when a second weight plane is defined. See Trial Run 1, 2, 3, 4
section on page 2-58 for more information.
Acquire Trial Run #3 Data- Acquire data for the third trial run. This feature is
only available when a third weight plane is defined. See Trial Run 1, 2, 3, 4 sec-
tion on page 2-58 for more information.
Acquire Trial Run #4 Data- Acquire data for the fourth trial run. This feature is
only available when a fourth weight plane is defined. See Trial Run 1, 2, 3, 4
section on page 2-58 for more information.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-57


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trial Run 1, 2, 3, 4
One trial run is required for each defined weight plane for the job. Data are
acquired after placing or removing a trial weight in or from the weight plane cor-
responding to the trial run number. If multiple speeds or measurement points are
defined, you are given a list to choose from. For example, for Trial Run 1:
1 ···· Add a trial weight to Weight Plane #1.

Note
Weights can be removed from a weight plane instead of added to a
weight plane

Note
Add weights at up to two locations in any weight plane. This is not
typically done, but some applications may require it.

Note
Although this is not typically done, weights can be placed in other
weight planes if more than one weight plane is defined for the job.

2 ···· Input a weight and location in the table shown by the software.
3 ···· Acquire data for all measurement points defined.
4 ···· If multiple speeds are defined, acquire data at each point for each
specified speed.

Note
Describe the location of the trial weight on any Trial Run measure-
ment before acquiring data.

5 ···· Repeat steps 1-4 if there are multiple trial runs.

2-58 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

For the next trial run, the trial weight from the previous plane can be removed
or left in place. However, if the weight from the previous run is left in place and
another weight is added for the next trial run, both must be entered into the table
for the trial weight amounts. The figure on page 2-61 shows this situation.
After trial run 1 was completed, the trial weight from run 1 was left in place and
an additional weight of 2 (oz., gm, Kg, lbs.) was added to Plane 2 at 120°.
All weights added to a single weight plane should be added at the same radius
from the center of the shaft, since the net effect is determined by both the weight
and the radius at which it is placed.
A 5 oz. weight placed at 10 in. has double the effect of a 5 oz. weight placed at
5 in. (50 oz.-in. versus 25 oz.-in.)
If weights are placed at different radii on the same weight plane, this must be
considered when entering trial weight data or placing correction weights. If the
weights for a single weight plane are all at the same radius, you need only con-
sider the weight units.
From the Select Measurement screen, press Enter or the appropriate function
key to advance to:
• The Trial Run Weight setup screen, if any of the trial run measurements
were selected.
• The Select Measurement Speed screen if more than one measurement
speed is defined for the job (Advanced Mode only) and none of the trial
run measurements were selected.
• The Select Measurement Point screen if none of the above are true.

Trial Run Weight Setup


Select a trial run measurement (such as Trial Run #1) to display the Trial Run
Weight Setup screen. The following items display if defined for the job (as
shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
• Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
• Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
• A plot representing a weight plane with continuous or discrete weight
based on Job Setup definitions.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-59


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trial Run Weight Setup Operation


A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) display on the plot.
The location of the trial weight(s) relative to the reference mark also displays.

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each
defined position displays on the XY diagram. This assists you with
job setup and orientation. No more than 12 weight placement posi-
tions display on the screen at one time, due to analyzer screen res-
olution. If more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, the
display adjusts automatically to show the numbers on the plot.
This assists with setup and orientation.

Note
Compare the diagram to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

Find this information in the upper section of the screen:


The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This field is
“Unknown” or accepts a positive numeric value from 0.00 - 650.00 inches and
0.00 - 1651 cm. Units retain job definitions.
The amount of the first weight “Weight 1." This field accepts either a positive
or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units retain
job definitions. A blank field is the default for the first trial run. For subsequent
trial runs, the default field may be blank or may retain information from a pre-
vious trial run.
The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. For a continuous weight plane
location is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation
from the leading edge of the rotor reference mark). For a discrete weight plane
location can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the
number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).

2-60 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The amount of the second weight “Weight 2". This field accepts either a positive
or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units retain
job definitions.
The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. For a continuous weight
plane location is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359. For a discrete weight
plane location can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before
the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).

The Weight Setup Screen with only one defined weight plane

Trial Run Weight Setup Function Keys (one weight plane)


Edit Plane 1 Wt. 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a first weight placed
in the specified plane. This field accepts either a positive or negative numeric
decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 1 Loc. 1 - Edit or enter the location of the first weight placed in the
specified plane. For a continuous weight plane location is expressed in degrees
between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the leading edge of the rotor
reference mark). For a discrete weight plane location can be any number
between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indicates discrete posi-
tions (only in Advanced Mode).

Acquiring Balance Data 2-61


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 1 Wt. 2 – Edit or enter the amount of weight for a second weight
placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are as defined for
the job.
Edit Plane 1 Loc. 2 - Edit or enter the location of the first weight placed in the
specified plane. For a continuous weight plane location is expressed in degrees
between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the leading edge of the rotor
reference mark). For a discrete weight plane location can be any number
between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indicates discrete posi-
tions (only in Advanced Mode).
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent diagram. This feature controls the rotation for all plots, if more than one dis-
plays.

Note
This option does not change Tach Options Configuration defini-
tions.

If two or more weight planes are defined, the Weight Setup Screen appears:

The Weight Setup Screen with two defined weight planes

2-62 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
If more than three weight planes are defined, the program displays
Planes 1 and 2 first.

Note
Press ALT on the trial weight entry screen to use the Calculator
Mode options (in particular, the Estimate Trial Weight calcula-
tion).

Press Enter to accept this screen and advance to:


The Select Measurement Speed screen, if more than one measurement speed is
defined for the job (Advanced Mode only).
The Select Measurement Point screen, if only one speed is defined for the job.

Trial Run Weight Setup Function Keys (two or more weight planes)
Select Weight Plane 3 / Select Weight Plane 3-4 / Select Weight Plane 1-2 – Dis-
plays additional planes, only if more than two weight planes are defined. Select
Weight Plane 3 displays if three weight planes are defined for the job and weight
planes 1 and 2 are displayed. Select Weight Plane 3-4 displays only if four
weight planes are defined for the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are displayed.
Select Weight Plane 1-2 displays only if three or more weight planes are defined
for the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are not displayed.
Edit Plane 1 Weight 1 / Plane 3 Weight 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a first weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a posi-
tive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 1 Weight
1 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Weight 1 displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays. This field's units are
as defined for the job.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-63


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 1 Location 1 / Plane 3 Location 1 - Edit or enter the location of the
first weight placed in the specified plane. For a continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). For a discrete weight plane location
can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number
indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode). Edit Plane 1 Location 1
displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Location 1 displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays.
Edit Plane 1 Weight 2 / Plane 3 Weight 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a second weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a pos-
itive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 1 Weight
2 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Weight 2 displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays. This field's units are
as defined for the job.

Edit Plane 1 Location 2 / Plane 3 Location 2 - Edit or enter the location of the
second weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane location can
be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indi-
cates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode). Edit Plane 1 Location 2 dis-
plays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Location 2 displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays.
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation for the current dia-
gram. This feature controls the rotation for all plots, if more than one displays.
Edit Plane 2 Weight 1 / Plane 4 Weight 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a first weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a posi-
tive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 2 Weight
1 displays if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Weight 1 displays if more
than two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays. This field's
units are as defined for the job.

2-64 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 2 Location 1 / Plane 4 Location 1 - Edit or enter the location of the
second weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane location can
be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indi-
cates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode). Edit Plane 2 Location 1 dis-
plays if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Location 1 displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays.
Edit Plane 2 Weight 2 / Plane 4 Weight 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a first weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a posi-
tive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 2 Weight
2 displays if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Weight 2 displays if more
than two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays. This field's
units are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 2 Location 2 / Plane 4 Location 2 - Edit or enter the location of the
second weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane location can
be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indi-
cates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode). Edit Plane 4 Location 2 dis-
plays if more than two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays.

Trial Run Weight Setup - Alternative Method For Editing/Entering Data


Once the edit mode is activated for a given field (for example, Weight 1), accept
the entry for a field with the Up/Down Arrow. This also activates the edit mode
for the adjacent field. This reduces the number of steps you need to take to enter
and edit data.
Examples:
If Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #1 was edited, press the Down Arrow to
accept Plane #1 Weight 1's entry and activate the edit mode for Location 1 (the
second field) under Plane #1.
If Location 1 (the second field) under Plane #1 was edited, press the Down
Arrow to accept Plane #1 Location 1's entry and activate the edit mode for
Weight 2 (the third field) under Plane #1.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-65


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If Weight 2 (the third field) under Plane #1 was edited, press the Down Arrow
to accept Plane #1 Weight 2's entry and activate the edit mode for Location 2
(the fourth/last field) under Plane #1.
If Location 2 (the fourth/last field) under Plane #1 was edited, press the Down
Arrow to accept Plane #1 Location 2's entry and activate the edit mode for
Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #2, if a second plane was defined for the
job. Otherwise, the edit mode for Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #1 is acti-
vated.

Note
The Up Arrow operates opposite of what is described above.

Note
If a second plane displays, use the Left/Right Arrow to move left
and right between fields/planes, accepting the entry in one field
and activating the edit mode in the other just as described for the
Up/Down Arrow.

Note
Use Enter to accept an entry and exit this particular edit mode oper-
ation.

Note
The same operations are available for Plane 3 and Plane 4 when
displayed (Advanced Mode only).

2-66 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Measurement Speed (Advanced Mode only)


The Select Measurement Speed screen displays if more than one measurement
speed is defined for the job. Otherwise, the Select Measurement Point screen
displays.

Select Measurement Speed Operation


The required measurements, as defined for the job, display with the next recom-
mended step highlighted (Speed 1 in this case).
In the figure below, six speeds are defined. As each of the measurements are
completed, an [X] next to the step indicate the step is completed and the next
recommended step is highlighted.

Note
Although the program has a recommended sequence, which it fol-
lows, you can select and acquire data on any measurement run.

Use the check-off sheet for Select Measurement. The message in the upper-center of the screen
indicates that the mux is enabled.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-67


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Measurement Speed Function Keys


Acquire Speed 1 - Advance to the next step in the procedure, where you can
acquire data for the first speed.
Acquire Speed 2 - Displays only if two or more speeds are defined. Advance to
the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the second speed.
Acquire Speed 3 – Displays only if three or more speeds are defined. Advance
to the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the third speed.
Acquire Speed 4 – Displays only if four or more speeds are defined. Advance to
the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the fourth speed.
Acquire Speed 5 – Displays only if five or more speeds are defined. Advance to
the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the fifth speed.
Acquire Speed 6 – Displays only if six speeds are defined. Advance to the next
step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the sixth speed.
Press Enter or the appropriate function key to accept this screen and advance to
the Select Measurement Point screen for the highlighted speed.

2-68 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Measurement Point


Select either Measurement Run or Speed (Advanced Mode only) to display the
Select Measurement Point screen. On the Select Measurement Point screen,
select the measurement point on which you want to acquire data.
In the example below, the four points defined for this job step are listed, with the
first point highlighted.

Select Measurement Operation


The required measurements, as defined for this job, display with the next step
highlighted (the first measurement point defined, in this case). Use the figures
on page 2-71 below as an example. Four measurement points are defined. As
you finish each measurement, [X] indicates completed measurements and the
next step is highlighted.

Note
The program follows a recommended sequence, but you can select
and acquire data on any measurement run.

There is a check off sheet for Select Measurement Point in the center of the
screen.
A message in the upper-center of the screen indicates an enabled mux.
The following information displays:
Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup. This is
where the data is collected.
Channel Number as defined under Job Setup. This is the channel
number of the selected point. The entire Channel column is not dis-
played if a mux is turned off for the job.
Speed (RPM) is entered manually or from the tach and expressed in
RPM.
Magnitude is entered manually or from the sensor, and measured as
defined in Job Setup.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-69


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
When the magnitude is equal to or less than the defined balance
spec, the magnitude reading displays in reverse video (as on page
2-72). When the magnitude is not within spec, the magnitude
reading is not displayed in reverse video.

Phase is entered manually or from the tach signal and sensor. It is


expressed in degrees.

A message at the bottom of the screen indicates whether Runout compensation


is subtracted.

2-70 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

These three screens display during a job:

This is the Select Measurement Point screen before you enter information or acquire data

This is the Select Measurement Point screen after acquiring data on point IBH

Acquiring Balance Data 2-71


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

This is the Select Measurement Point screen after you enter information or acquire data for all
the points. The message at the bottom of the screen tells you to continue to the next step

Select Measurement Function Keys


Toggle Runout – Enable Subtract Runout to display this function. Acquire or
manually enter Runout and other data on the point. This function is not dis-
played when you acquire Subtract Runout measurement data. A message at the
bottom of the screen warns you if runout compensation is in effect.
Compare the reading with runout subtracted to the balance spec, not the uncom-
pensated reading. The reading with runout subtracted helps to determine the bal-
ance condition of the machine.
Start Acquisition / Next Step - Press Start Acquisition to acquire data on the
highlighted point. Next Step is only active after data is acquired or manually
entered on all points. When Next Step activates, the highlighted “Proceed to
Next Step” option displays at the bottom of the screen.

Note
Use the Up/Down Arrow to highlight a measurement point if you
need to retake a reading and overwrite the previous information.

2-72 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 73 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

To acquire data for the highlighted measurement point, press Enter (or the
appropriate function key) to advance to the Acquire Readings screen, where
data acquisition begins.
If “Proceed to Next Step” is highlighted, press Enter (or the appropriate function
key) to accept this screen and move on to the next step.

Acquiring Readings
Select a measurement point to start data acquisition.

Caution!
Acquire data from the specified location for the highlighted mea-
surement point. If you assign data from other measurement points
to this location, you invalidate all calculations.

Note
During the Reference Run, after selecting the measurement point
and before displaying the data acquisition screen: 1) the analyzer
auto-ranges; 2) In Advanced Mode, additional data is acquired for
the Balancing Watchdog data checks.

Acquire Data Operations


The header contains the acquired measurement type and the defined speed (for
example, Speed1).
A message in the upper-center of the screen indicates an enabled mux.
Any errors that may occur during the data acquisition display at the bottom of
the screen.
Press Back or Reset to exit data acquisition mode without accepting and saving
the reading.
The following information displays:
Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup. This is
the selected point for acquisition.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-73


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 74 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Channel Number as defined under Job Setup. This is the channel


number of the selected point for acquisition. The entire Channel
column is not displayed if a mux is turned off for the job.
Speed (RPM) is acquired from tach signal instantaneously and is
expressed in RPM.
Magnitude is acquired from sensor. Magnitude is averaged and
measured as defined for the job.
Phase is acquired from tach signal and sensor. Phase is averaged
and expressed in degrees.

Note
During the data acquisition, magnitude and phase data are not dis-
played with the Runout information subtracted.

A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect the data as it is
acquired. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation
(represented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) display on the
plot.

Note
Compare the diagram to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

The following information also displays on the plot:


• A cross hair (+) symbol indicates the endpoint of the averaged phase/
magnitude vector.
• A vector line with a terminating square symbol (†) on one end indicates
the instantaneous vector.
• Vector lines without terminating symbols indicate phase variations of
more than 15 degrees. These represent minimum and maximum vectors.
• The data stability bar graph displays in the center left side of the plot.
This graph displays both phase and magnitude averages.
A data stability bar graph displays in the lower right section of the screen. This
graph helps you determine good or poor data.

2-74 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 75 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• Phase readings with average variations of +/- 2.5 degrees or less are con-
sidered “Good;” otherwise, they are considered “Poor.”
• Magnitude readings with average variations of +/- 5% or less are consid-
ered “Good;” otherwise, they are considered “Poor.”
• Reference Run information displays in the lower right section of the
screen, below the data stability graph, only during trial runs.
• When the data acquisition for that point begins this screen displays. In the
following example, Trial Run data is acquired on IBV.

The Trial Run screen in Acquire Data mode.

Data Acquisition Function Keys


Accept Data - Press to accept the reading and continue to the Select Measure-
ment Point screen. (you can also press Enter).
Expand Plot Scale - Press to increase the plot scale.
Decrease Plot Scale - Press to decrease the plot scale.
Toggle Direction Rotation – Toggle the displayed rotation for the current dia-
gram.
Clear Data - Clear the averaged magnitude and phase data. When the data is
cleared the data average starts again.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-75


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 76 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Display Ref. Run Data - This option is not displayed during the Runout and Ref-
erence Run data acquisitions. It is only available during the Trial Run, but only
after acquiring the Reference Run reading for the selected point. Toggle
between displaying and not displaying Reference Run information for the
selected point. When selected, the vector information displays on the lower right
side of the screen, just below the data stability bar graph.

The Trial Run screen in Acquire Data mode.

Allow Data collection to continue until magnitude is stable and phase varies by
no more than 5°. Use the Data Stability Bar to identify when the magnitude is
stable. The best solution is produced from data in the Good range. When the data
appear to be stable, press Enter or Accept Data.
If you specified Auto for the mux enabled input (when defining the sensor), the
program automatically accepts the data and moves to the next point when both
the phase and magnitude are in the Good range for three consecutive averages.
Press Enter or Accept Data to force the use of data that is less stable.

Note
While collecting data, Press Clear Data to clear the averages and
start over.

2-76 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 77 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If you lose the signal from the tachometer transducer, you will get a warning
message. “Waiting for Trigger” displays if the tach signal is interrupted after
starting acquisition. “Tachometer Timeout” displays if no tach signal is present.
If the RPM readings are outside the RPM window (reference RPM ± delta) as
specified in the Tach Options Configuration screen, a warning message dis-
plays). When this occurs, the RPM continues to display and update, but the mag-
nitude and phase data is not displayed. Magnitude and phase data continues to
display and update where it left off, once the RPM returns to within the defined
RPM window. Any data outside the delta band is automatically excluded from
the averages.
If the tachometer readings vary by more than 6% between revolutions, a Tach
Not Stable message displays.
Press Enter or Accept Data to accept this screen and to view acquired data on
the Select Measurement Point screen.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-77


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 78 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquiring Data - Reference Run Balancing Watchdog


The Balancing Watchdog data check is only available in Advanced Balance
Mode. After acquiring the last Reference Run reading, the data is checked to see
if any potential problems exist. If there are any problems, a message displays to
warn you.
Sometimes, mistakes are made in using balance procedures to resolve machine
vibration not caused by imbalance.

1xRPM is less than 50% of total energy


This check is available in both the Basic and Advanced Balance modes.
The only vibration frequency that is significantly reduced by the balance proce-
dure is at 1xRPM (rotational frequency). If less than half of the vibratory energy
is at 1xRPM, Fast Bal will alert you to this condition. Those points tripping this
alert are listed along with the percentage of energy occurring at the rotational
frequency.
The message includes the following information:
• The measurement plane number, as defined for the job.
• The measurement point ID, as defined for the job.
• The condition of each measurement point.
During the Reference Run, an overall (analog) reading is acquired. This data
can’t be seen by the user, but the energy of the measurement points at 1xTS is
compared to the energy of the overall.
If this warning appears, you may want to acquire a frequency signature at those
points to determine what other frequencies are present, as well as to consider
other possible causes. CSI recommends you do this with the same vibration
units (acceleration, velocity, or displacement) since changing units can dramat-
ically change the apparent distribution of energy. For example, displacement
emphasizes the lower frequencies and acceleration emphasizes the higher fre-
quencies. A help message reminds you of this alert.

2-78 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 79 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Vibration is Direction Sensitive


This check is only available in Advanced Balance Mode.
When the vibration magnitude at the rotational frequency is significantly dif-
ferent at various radial positions in the same measurement plane, there are two
common causes:
• The structure may be highly constrained in one direction but very flexible
in another. Some vertical pumps exhibit this condition when braced in
only one direction.
• This could indicate the presence of a resonance near rotational frequency
at the axis with the higher magnitude.
Often, the first condition may contribute to the second. The greater concern is
the possible presence of a resonance, because this may make the machine diffi-
cult to balance or to keep balanced.
Fast Bal classifies a ratio greater than 3:1 but less than 8:1 as Moderate. Ratios
greater than 8:1 are classified as High. If the ratio alert is triggered for two sen-
sors close to 90° apart, and the phase change is approximately 0° or 180°, then
the probability of a resonance increases. This is classified “Resonance Likely.”
The message includes the following information:
• The measurement plane number, as defined for the job.
• The measurement point ID, as defined for the job.
The condition of each measurement point. When a point's condition is OK it is
labeled “not detected.”
When a point's condition is not OK, it is labeled with one of the following three
severity levels:
• Moderate
• High
• Resonance Likely
A help message reminds you to look at these indications if you have problems
balancing this machine, or if it is a chronically out-of-balance unit.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-79


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 80 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Axial 1xRPM Vibration Greater than Radial


This check is only available in the Advanced Balance Mode.
Imbalance usually causes higher radial vibration magnitudes at rotational fre-
quency than axial magnitudes. Sometimes, overhung rotors display high axial
vibration at 1xRPM. However, misalignment may also show up at 1xRPM and
can be confused with imbalance. Unfortunately, while balancing reduces the
vibration energy at 1xRPM due to imbalance, it does not help decrease 1xRPM
vibration energy due to misalignment.
Although most people do not use an axial sensor during balancing, it can be
useful. If you use both axial and radial sensors at a measurement plane, Fast Bal
runs tests and (if a condition exists) warns you about these conditions.
A popup message warns:
• A note stating the “1xRPM vibration may have causes other than imbal-
ance”.
• The measurement plane number in which this condition exists, as defined
for the job.
A help message reminds you of this information.

1xRPM End-to-End Phase Difference is Greater than 40 Degrees


This check is only available in the Advanced Balance mode.
On a two bearing system, typically the end to end horizontal phase difference
should be less than 40 degrees different from the end to end vertical phase dif-
ference. When the condition exists where the end to end horizontal phase dif-
ference is greater than 40 degrees different from the end to end vertical phase
difference, the 1xRPM vibration may be due to misalignment rather than imbal-
ance.
If balancing does not satisfactorily resolve the 1xRPM vibration, either check
alignment or acquire an FFT at the indicated points using the same sensor setup
as the Balance job to determine what other vibration frequencies are present.
Fast Bal runs tests and warns you about this condition, if it exists.

2-80 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 81 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

A popup message warns:


• A note stating the “Reference Data End-to-End 1x Phase Difference > 40
Degrees”.
• The measurement plane numbers and measurement point IDs in which
this condition exists, as defined for the job.
A help message reminds you of this alert.

Acquiring Data - Trial Run Balancing Watchdog


After acquiring the last reading of any Trial Run, the data is checked to see if
any potential problems exist. If there are any problems, a message displays to
warn you.

1xRPM End-to-End Phase Difference is Less than 100 Degrees


On a two bearing two weight plane system, if the phase of the Trial Weight
Vector on the first bearing is not at least 100 degrees from the Trial Weight
Vector on the second bearing, then the pivot point of the rotor is not between the
bearings. It may be difficult or impossible to two plane balance the unit.
If balancing does not satisfactorily resolve the 1xRPM vibration, consider per-
forming a single plane balance instead of a two plane balance. Fast Bal runs tests
and warns you about this condition, if it exists.
A popup message warns:
• A note stating the “Trial Run Data End-to-End 1x Phase Difference < 100
Degrees”.
• The measurement plane numbers and measurement point IDs in which
this condition exists, as defined for the job.
A help message reminds you of this alert.

1xRPM End-to-End Phase Difference is Greater than or Equal to 100 De-


grees
On a two bearing single weight plane system, if the phase of the Trial Weight
Vector on the first bearing is 100 or more degrees from the Trial Weight Vector
on the second bearing, then the pivot point of the rotor is between the bearings.
It may be difficult or impossible to single plane balance the unit.

Acquiring Balance Data 2-81


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 82 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If balancing does not satisfactorily resolve the 1xRPM vibration, consider per-
forming a two plane balance instead of a single plane balance. Fast Bal runs tests
and warns you about this condition, if it exists.
A popup message warns:
• A note stating the “Trial Run Data End-to-End 1x Phase Difference Š 100
Degrees”.
• The measurement plane numbers and measurement point IDs in which
this condition exists, as defined for the job.
A help message reminds you of this alert.

Completing Measurement Runs


After completing each measurement run, the program advances to the next step.
After completing each trial run (once data is acquired for all measurement points
for a given trial run), the pop up box in the figure below displays:

Remove or keep your Trial Weights before going to the next step

Select “Yes” to remove trial weights before starting the next step. Select “No”
to leave trial weights as-is and include them in the next step. Continue to the
next step in the procedure.

2-82 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 83 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If you need more data, press Enter to advance to the required measurement
screen. If you are finished, press Enter to return to the Main Menu and complete
Acquire Data.

The Main Menu tells you which sections still need to be completed

Acquiring Balance Data 2-83


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 84 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

View Balance Correction


You can see the calculated balance correction by pressing View Balance Correc-
tion.
View Balance Correction is the third of four required steps to complete a balance
job. Before you can access View Balance Correction, you must complete Job
Setup and Acquire Data. After completing Trim Run, you return to View Bal-
ance Correction for the next recommended correction.

Note
After completing any step the program automatically advances.

This section describes:


• Removing, adding, or leaving weights on one weight plane.
• Removing, adding, or leaving weights on two or more weight planes.
• Detailed screen descriptions.
• How to read a balance correction.
• How to configure a balance correction so it meets your needs.

View Balance Correction Operation


You cannot access this section if any of the required Reference and Trial Run
information and readings are missing.

Note
If a less than 5% change in measurement response between the
Reference Run and the Trial Run data occurs, a warning message
displays as soon as you enter View Balance Correction. If this hap-
pens, press Enter to continue. The balance correction is calculated,
and you can continue the job. However, keep in mind that insuffi-
cient Vibration magnitude changes can produce inaccurate influ-
ence coefficients.

2-84 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 85 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

A diagram in the lower section of the screen reflects the calculated correction.
The defined tach (T) location and the direction of rotation display on the plot.
The location of the trial weight(s) relative to the reference mark are represented
by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered on the XY-
axis.

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each
defined position displays on an XY diagram. This helps you with
job setup and orientation. No more than 12 weight placement posi-
tions display on the screen at one time, due to analyzer screen res-
olution. If more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, the
display adjusts automatically to show the numbers on the plot.

Note
Compare the diagram to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:


• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field is “Unknown” or accepts a positive numeric value from 0.01 -
650.00. Units retain job definitions.
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1". This field accepts either a pos-
itive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's
units retain job definitions.
• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. A continuous weight
plane is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation
from the leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight
plane can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before
the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
• The amount of the second weight “Weight 2." This field accepts either a
positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This
field's units retain job definitions.

View Balance Correction 2-85


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 86 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. A continuous


weight plane is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359. A discrete weight
plane can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before
the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
If active, function keys perform the associated step or option, and advance the
program to the next screen.
If only one weight plane has been defined for the job, the balance correction
screen appears as shown in the figure below:

Only one weight plane is defined in this example

View Balance Correction Function Keys (one-weight plane)


Leave Trial Weight On / Remove Trial Weight - Tell the program if the trial
weights from the last trial run were left on or removed.
The display for this key changes between the two options depending on the last
selection. A message indicating the trial weight status displays in the upper
center of the screen. The Balance Correction defaults to remove the trial weight.
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation for the current dia-
gram. This feature controls the rotation for all plots, if more than one displays.

2-86 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 87 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
This option does not change what is defined under Tach Options
Setup.

Remove Weight / Add Weight - Tells the program if correction weights are being
added or removed. The display for this key changes between the two options
depending on the last selection. The Balance Correction defaults to having the
weight added.
If two or more weight planes have been defined for the job, the balance correc-
tion screen will be laid out as shown below.

The Balance Correction screen with two weight planes defined.

View Balance Correction Function Keys (two or more weight planes)


Leave Trial Weight On / Remove Trial Weight -- Only displays before you com-
plete any trim correction runs. After completing Acquire Data, this option lets
you tell the program if the trial weights from the last trial run were left on or
removed.
The display for this key toggles between the two options, depending on the last
selection after completing the last trial run. A message indicates the trial weight
status displays in the upper center of the screen.

View Balance Correction 2-87


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 88 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Weight Plane 3 / Select Weight Plane 3-4 / Select Weight Plane 1-2 - Only
active in Advanced Balance Mode when more than two weight planes are
defined. This option allows you to display the additional planes, if defined.
Select Weight Plane 3 displays only if three weight planes are defined for the job
and weight planes 1 and 2 display. Select Weight Plane 3-4 displays only if four
weight planes are defined for the job and weight planes 1 and 2 display. Select
Weight Plane 1-2 displays only if three or more weight planes are defined for
the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are not displayed.
Remove Weight / Add Weight - Tells the program if correction weights are
added or removed. The display for this key changes between the two options
depending on the last selection. The Balance Correction defaults to adding
weight.
Press Enter to accept this screen and advance to the Main Menu. Notice View
Balance Correction is marked complete and the next recommended step in the
procedure is highlighted.

Press Enter to continue to Trim Run 1

2-88 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 89 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trim Run
The trim balance takes place in the Trim Run step. This is the last step of the
four required to complete a balance job. You must complete Job Setup, Acquire
Data, and View Balance Correction before you can access Trim Run.
This section describes:
• Trim Run status
• Applied Weight
• Acquire Trim Data
• Acquire Trim Data – Tolerance Check

Note
Unless otherwise noted, the default settings are only used at first.
Once you modify a field, the program defaults to the last entry for
that field.

Note
The program advances automatically after you complete each step.

The first Trim Run is called Trim Run 1, and it is displayed on the Main Menu.
There can be a maximum of eight Trim Run numbers. Once the previous Trim
Run is complete, the trim correction for that run displays.

Trim Run 2-89


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 90 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trim Run Operation

Steps to Acquire Balance Job Trim Data


1 ···· Define the applied trim run weight parameters.
2 ···· Select the measurement type trim data is to be acquired for.
3 ···· Select the measurement speed trim data is to be acquired for, if more than
one is defined for the job.
4 ···· Select the measurement point trim data is to be acquired for.
5 ···· Check the acquired data against the balance spec.
6 ···· Repeat steps 2-5 (as needed) until all required data has been acquired and
checked.
7 ···· Complete the trim run and continue to the next step.

Trim Run Status


Select Trim Run to view the Trim Run status screen.

Trim Run Status Operation


As each trim run is started, the first step in the recommended flow (Applied
Weight in this case) is highlighted.
The check off sheet for the Trim Run displays in the center of the screen.
Trim Run allows you to use a three-step operation in performing a trim balance.
The three steps include:
1 ···· Applied Weight – defines the required trim weight setup information.
2 ···· Acquire Trim Data – acquires the required trim readings.
3 ···· Proceed to Next Step – displays after Applied Weight and Acquire Trim
Data are complete. Once active, accepting it returns you to the Main
Menu.

2-90 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 91 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
You must complete all three steps to complete a trim run. All of
the acquired data is stored automatically with the balance job.
However, trim data is not displayed unless the Trim Run step on
the Main Menu is marked as complete [X].

Trim Run 1 check-off screen

Note
This program follows a recommended sequence, but you can select
and acquire data on any measurement run.

Both Applied Weight and Acquire Trim Data are active; therefore, you do not
have to complete Applied Weight to complete Acquire Trim Data.
You cannot continue to the next step and finish the Trim Run until completing
both Applied Weight and Acquire Trim Data.

Trim Run 2-91


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 92 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

A message at the top of the screen indicates an enabled mux.

This message alerts you that the mux is enabled.

Trim Run Status Function Keys


Applied Weight – Enter the amount and location of the trim weight correction(s)
made for the trim run. See the Applied Weight section on page 2-92 for more
information.
Acquire Trim Data - Verifies the result of the trim run. See the Acquire Trim
Data section on page 2-103 for more information.
Next Step - Only active after the Applied Weight and Acquire Trim Data are
complete. When this key is active, “Proceed to Next Step” is highlighted at the
bottom of the screen.

Note
You can reselect a step with the Up/Down Arrow when “Proceed
to Next Step” is highlighted at the bottom of the screen.

Press Enter or the appropriate function key to accept this screen and advance to
Applied Weight.

Applied Weight
Enter trim weight and location information for your balance correction on the
Applied Weight setup screen. You can use this data for later reference and to
estimate residual vibration (Advanced Mode only).
This is the first step you must complete for a Trim Run. The following items dis-
play only if they are defined for the job (see the figure on page 2-94).
• Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
• Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).

2-92 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 93 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• A plot displays that represents a weight plane with either continuous


weight positions (see the figure on page 2-94) or discrete weight posi-
tions (Advanced Mode only), depending on how the plane is defined
under Job Setup.

Applied Weight Operation


Input fields default to the last calculated balance correction solution, but can be
altered to reflect actual changes.
A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen and reflects changes to
input fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rota-
tion display on the plot. The location of the trial weight(s) relative to the refer-
ence mark (represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the
circle centered on the XY-axis) also displays.

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each
defined position displays on an XY diagram. This helps you with
job setup and orientation. No more than 12 weight placement posi-
tions display on the screen at one time, due to analyzer screen res-
olution. If more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, the
display adjusts automatically to show the numbers on the plot.

Note
Compare the diagram to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

This information is located in the upper section of the screen:


• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field is “Unknown” or accepts a positive numeric value from 0.01 -
650.00. This field's units retain job definitions.
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1". This field accepts either a pos-
itive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's
units retain job definitions.

Trim Run 2-93


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 94 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. A continuous weight
plane is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation
from the leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight
plane can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before
the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
• The amount of the second weight “Weight 2". This field accepts either a
positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This
field's units retain job definitions.
• The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. A continuous
weight plane is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359. A discrete weight
plane can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before
the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).

Applied Weight Trim Run 1 screen

Press Enter to accept this screen and advance to Trim Run status.

Applied Weight Function Keys (one weight plane)


Edit Plane 1 Weight 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a first weight
placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are as defined for
the job.

2-94 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 95 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 1 Location 1 - Edit or enter the location of the first weight placed in
the specified plane. A continuous weight plane is expressed in degrees between
0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the leading edge of the rotor reference
mark). A discrete weight plane can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at”
symbol (@) before the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced
Mode).
Edit Plane 1 Weight 2 – Edit or enter the amount of weight for a second weight
placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are as defined for
the job. The default is blank.
Edit Plane 1 Location 2 - Edit or enter the location of the first weight placed in
the specified plane. A continuous weight plane is expressed in degrees between
0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the leading edge of the rotor reference
mark). A discrete weight plane can be any number between 1 - 100. The “at”
symbol (@) before the number indicates discrete positions (only in Advanced
Mode).
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent diagram. This feature controls the rotation direction for all plots, if more
than one displays.

Note
This option does not change Tach Configuration Setup definitions.

Leave Trial Weight On / Remove Trial Weight - These options only display
during the first trim run. Use them to tell the program if the trial weights from
the last trial weight run were left on or removed.
The display for these options changes, depending on the last selection. A mes-
sage indicating the trial weight status displays in the upper center of the screen.
The program default removes trial weight. In this case, “Trial Weight is Off” dis-
plays. When the trial weight is left on, “Trial Weight is On” displays.

Trim Run 2-95


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 96 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Estimate Results
This option is only active in Advanced Balance mode. Use the Estimate Results
function to view the estimated magnitude and phase based on the applied trim
weight.

Estimate Residual Vibration Operation


Available Options:
• Measurement Plane (as defined under Job Setup)
• Measurement Point ID (MPT) (as defined under Job Setup)
• Magnitude as calculated by program. (units as defined for the job)
• Phase as calculated by program. (units are degrees)

Estimated Residual Vibration for Trim Run 1

Estimated Residual Vibration Function Keys


Exit Estimate Results – Exit the utility and return to the last screen.
Select Speed – Displays if more then one speed is defined under Job Setup.
When displayed, this key toggles through the information for each speed.

2-96 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 97 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Significantly different residual vibration responses may result from inaccurate


data or weight placement, changing system response due to large changes in
vibration magnitude, or other causes of system non-linearity. If vibration mag-
nitudes are no longer responding satisfactorily from the calculated solutions,
new reference and trial runs may be required or the limits of system linearity
may have been achieved.
If two or more weight planes are defined for the job, the Applied Weight screen
will be laid out as shown in the figure below. If more than three weight planes
are defined for the job, the program displays Planes 1 and 2 first.

Two or more weight planes are defined for the job in this example.

Press Enter to accept this screen and advance to the Trim Run status screen.

Applied Weight Function Keys (two or more weight planes)


Select Weight Plane 3 / Select Weight Plane 3-4 / Select Weight Plane 1-2 – Dis-
plays additional planes, only if more than two weight planes are defined. Select
Weight Plane 3 displays if three weight planes are defined for the job and weight
planes 1 and 2 are displayed.

Trim Run 2-97


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 98 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Weight Plane 3-4 displays only if four weight planes are defined for the
job and weight planes 1 and 2 are displayed. Select Weight Plane 1-2 displays
only if three or more weight planes are defined for the job and weight planes 1
and 2 are not displayed.
Edit Plane 1 Weight 1 / Plane 3 Weight 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a first weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a posi-
tive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000.
Edit Plane 1 Weight 1 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Weight 1
displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays.
This field's units are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 1 Location 1 / Plane 3 Location 1 - Edit or enter the location of the
first weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location is
expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane location can
be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indi-
cates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
Edit Plane 1 Location 1 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Location
1 displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the third plane dis-
plays.
Edit Plane 1 Weight 2 / Plane 3 Weight 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a second weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a pos-
itive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000.
Edit Plane 1 Weight 2 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Weight 2
displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays.
This field's units are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 1 Location 2 / Plane 3 Location 2 - Edit or enter the location of the
second weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane location can
be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indi-
cates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
Edit Plane 1 Location 2 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Location
2 displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the third plane dis-
plays.

2-98 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 99 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed direction of rotation for the
current diagram. This feature controls the rotation direction for all plots, if more
than one displays.

Note
This option does not change Tach Configuration Setup definitions.

Leave Trial Wt. On / Remove Trial Weight - These options only display during
the first trim run. Use them to tell the program if the trial weights from the last
trial run were left on or removed.
The display for these options changes, depending on the last selection. A mes-
sage indicating the trial weight status displays in the upper center of the screen.
The program default removes trial weight. In this case, “Trial Weight is Off” dis-
plays. When the trial weight is left on, “Trial Weight is On” displays.
Edit Plane 2 Weight 1 / Plane 4 Weight 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a first weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a posi-
tive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000.
Edit Plane 2 Weight 1 displays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Weight 1
displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays.
This field's units are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 2 Location 1 / Plane 4 Location 1 - Edit or enter the location of the
second weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane location can
be any number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indi-
cates discrete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
Edit Plane 2 Location 1 displays if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Loca-
tion 1 displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane
displays.
Edit Plane 2 Weight 2 / Plane 4 Weight 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight
for a second weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts either a pos-
itive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000.
Edit Plane 2 Weight 2 displays if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Weight
2 displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane dis-
plays. This field's units are as defined for the job.

Trim Run 2-99


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 100 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 2 Location 2 / Plane 4 Location 2 - Edit or enter the location of the
second weight placed in the specified plane. A continuous weight plane location
is expressed in degrees between 0 - 359 (measured against rotation from the
leading edge of the rotor reference mark). A discrete weight plane can be any
number between 1 - 100. The “at” symbol (@) before the number indicates dis-
crete positions (only in Advanced Mode).
Edit Plane 2 Location 2 displays if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Loca-
tion 2 displays if more than two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane
displays.
Estimate Results – Only active in Advanced Balance Mode. View estimated
magnitude and phase resulting from the applied trim weight.

Estimate Residual Vibration Operation


• Measurement Plane (as defined under Job Setup)
• Measurement Point ID (MPT) (as defined under Job Setup)
• Magnitude as calculated by program. (units as defined for the job)
• Phase as calculated by program. (units are degrees)

Estimated Residual Vibration for Trim Run 1

2-100 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 101 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Estimated Residual Vibration Function Keys


Exit Estimate Results – Exit the utility and return to the last screen.
Select Speed – This option only displays if more then one speed has been
defined under Job Setup. When displayed, it allows you to select from a list of
defined speeds to display the data for the selected speed.

Alternative Method to Edit/Enter Data


In edit mode, use the Up/Down Arrow to accept the entry for a field or activate
the edit mode for the next field. This reduces the number of steps required to edit
or enter data.
Examples:
• If Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #1 is the active field being edited,
press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Weight 1's entry and activate the
edit mode for Location 1 (the second field) under Plane #1.
• If Location 1 (the second field) under Plane #1 is the active field being
edited, press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Location 1's entry and acti-
vate the edit mode for Weight 2 (the third field) under Plane #1.
• If Weight 2 (the third field) under Plane #1 is the active field being edited,
press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Weight 2's entry and activate the
edit mode for Location 2 (the fourth/last field) under Plane #1.
• If Location 2 (the fourth/last field) under Plane #1 is the active field being
edited, press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Location 2's entry and acti-
vate the edit mode for Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #2, if a second
plane was defined for the job. Otherwise, the edit mode for Weight 1 (the
first field) under Plane #1 is activated.

Note
The Up Arrow operates opposite of the Down Arrow.

Note
If a second plane displays, use the Left/Right Arrows to move left
and right between fields/planes, and to accept the entry in one field
and activate the edit mode in the other field just as described for
the Up/Down Arrows.

Trim Run 2-101


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 102 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Press Enter at any time to accept an entry and exit.

Note
When displayed, the same operations are available for Plane 3 and
Plane 4 (Advanced Mode only).

Press Enter to accept the Applied Weight screen and advance to the Trim Run
Status screen. Once Applied Weight is complete, Acquire Trim Data is high-
lighted.

Trim Run 1 check-off screen

Press Enter or the appropriate function key to accept this screen and advance to
Acquire Trim Data.

2-102 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 103 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquire Trim Data


From Acquire Trim Data (selected from the Trim Run status screen) trim run
data is acquired and compared to the balance tolerance. This is the second of
three steps needed to complete a Trim Run. Select Acquire Trim Data to
advance to:
• The Select Measurement Speed screen, if more than one measurement
speed is defined for the job (Advanced Mode only).
or
• The Select Measurement Point screen, if no more than one measurement
speed is defined for the job.

Select Measurement Speed (Advanced Mode only)


In Acquire Trim Data, if more than one measurement speed has been defined for
the job, the following Select Measurement Speed screen displays; otherwise, the
Select Measurement Point screen displays.

Select Measurement Speed Operation


The required measurements, as defined for the job, display with the next step
highlighted (the first measurement point defined, in this case). Use the figure on
page 2-104 as an example. Four measurement points are defined. As you finish
each measurement, [X] indicates completed measurements and the next step is
highlighted.

Note
The program follows a recommended sequence, but you can select
and acquire data on any measurement run.

There is a check off sheet for Select Measurement Speed in the center of the
screen.

Trim Run 2-103


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 104 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

A message in the upper-center of the screen indicates an enabled mux.

Select Measurement Speed screen

Select Measurement Speed Function Keys


Acquire Speed 1 - Advances you to the next step in the procedure, where you
can acquire data for the first speed.
Acquire Speed 2 - Only displays if two or more speeds are defined. Advances
you to the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the second
speed.
Acquire Speed 3 – Only displays if three or more speeds are defined. Advances
you to the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the third
speed.
Acquire Speed 4 – Only displays if four or more speeds are defined. Advances
you to the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the fourth
speed.
Acquire Speed 5 – Only displays if five or more speeds are defined. Advances
you to the next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the fifth
speed.
Acquire Speed 6 – Only displays if six speeds are defined. Advances you to the
next step in the procedure, where you can acquire data for the sixth speed.

2-104 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 105 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or the appropriate function key to accept this screen and advance to
the Select Measurement Point screen for the highlighted speed.

Select Measurement Point


Depending on how the job was defined, once Acquire Data or the speed
(Advanced Mode only) has been selected the Select Measurement Point screen
displays. From this screen, select the measurement point where you want to
acquire data.
In the example below, four points have been defined for the job. The next rec-
ommended step in the sequence (the first measurement point defined for the job
in this case) is highlighted.

Note
If only one measurement point and speed have been defined for the
job, the Select Measurement Point screen is not displayed and the
data acquisition begins automatically.

Select Measurement Point Operation


The required measurement point(s), as defined for the job, are displayed with
the next recommended step highlighted (the first defined measurement point, in
this case). As in the figure on page 2-107, four measurement points are defined.
As each of the measurements is completed, the next recommended step (mea-
surement point, in this case) is highlighted.

Note
The program follows a recommended sequence, but you can select
and acquire data on any measurement point.

Use the Up/Down Arrow to highlight the adjacent measurement point.

This message alerts you that the mux is enabled.

Trim Run 2-105


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 106 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The following information displays:


Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup. This is
where the data is collected.
Channel Number as defined under Job Setup. This is the channel
number of the mux assigned to the selected point. The entire
Channel column is not displayed if a mux is set to off for the job.
Speed (RPM) is entered manually or from the tach and expressed in
RPM.
Magnitude is entered manually or from the sensor, and measured as
defined in Job Setup.

Note
When the magnitude is equal to or less than the defined balance
spec, the magnitude reading displays in reverse video. When the
magnitude is not within spec, the magnitude reading is not dis-
played in reverse video.

Phase is entered manually or from the tach and expressed in


degrees.
A message at the bottom of the screen indicates whether Runout compensation
is subtracted.

2-106 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 107 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Depending on where you are in the job you'll see one of the following three
screens. Before any data is acquired or entered on any measurement point, you
see the screen in the figure below:

This screen displays before data is acquired

Trim Run 2-107


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 108 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The figure below appears after data is acquired or entered on any measurement
point:

This screen appears after acquiring data

2-108 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 109 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The figure below appears after data is acquired or entered on all measurement
points. A message at the bottom of the screen instructs you to continue to the
next step:

This screen displays after data is acquired on all measurement points

Select Measurement Function Keys


Toggle Subtract Runout – Enable Subtract Runout to display this function.
Acquire or manually enter Runout and other data on the point. This function is
not displayed while you acquire Subtract Runout measurement data. A message
at the bottom of the screen warns you if runout compensation is in effect.
Compare the reading with runout subtracted to the balance specifications, not
the uncompensated reading. The reading with runout subtracted helps to deter-
mine the balance condition of the machine.
Start Acquisition / Next Step - Press Start Acquisition to acquire data on the
highlighted point. Next Step is only active after data has been acquired or man-
ually entered on all points. When Next Step activates, Next Step is highlighted
and displays at the bottom of the screen.

Note
Use the Up/Down Arrow to highlight a measurement point if you
need to retake a reading and overwrite the previous information.

Trim Run 2-109


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 110 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

To acquire data for the highlighted measurement point, press Enter (or the
appropriate function key) to advance to the Acquire Readings screen, where
data acquisition begins. If the “Proceed to Next Step” option is highlighted,
press Enter (or the appropriate function key) to accept this screen and advance
to the next step.

2-110 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 111 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquiring Readings
Select a measurement point to start data acquisition.

Caution!
Acquire data from the specified location for the highlighted mea-
surement point. If you assign data from other measurement points
to this location, you invalidate all calculations.

Acquire Data Operation


The header contains the measurement type and the speed (such as Speed1), if
defined.
A message at the top of the screen indicates an enabled mux.

This message alerts you that the mux is enabled.

Any errors that may occur during the data acquisition display at the bottom of
the screen.
Press Back or Reset to exit data acquisition mode without accepting and saving
the reading.
The following information displays:
Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup. This is
the selected point for data acquisition.
Channel Number as defined under Job Setup. This is the channel
number of the mux assigned to the selected point for data acquisi-
tion. The entire Channel column is not displayed if a mux is set to
off for the job.
Speed (RPM) is acquired from the tach signal instantaneously and
is expressed in RPM.
Magnitude is acquired from the sensor. Magnitude is averaged and
measured as defined for the job.

Trim Run 2-111


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 112 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
When the magnitude is equal to or less than the defined balance
spec, the magnitude reading displays in reverse video. When the
magnitude is not within spec, the magnitude reading is not dis-
played in reverse video.

Phase is acquired from the tach signal and the sensor. Phase is aver-
aged and expressed in degrees.

Note
During the data acquisition, magnitude and phase data are not dis-
played with the Runout information subtracted. Compare the
reading with runout subtracted to the balance spec, not the uncom-
pensated reading. The reading with runout subtracted helps to
determine the balance condition of the machine.

A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect the data as it is
acquired. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation
(represented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) display on the
plot.

Note
Compare the diagram to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

The following information also displays on the plot:


• A cross hair (+) symbol indicates the endpoint of the averaged phase/
magnitude vector.
• A vector line with a terminating square symbol (†) on one end indicates
the instantaneous vector.
• Vector lines without terminating symbols indicate phase variations of
more than 15o. These represent minimum and maximum vectors.
• A circle representing the specified balance spec is centered around the
plot axis.

2-112 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 113 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The data stability bar graph displays in the center left side of the plot. This graph
displays both phase and magnitude averages.
• The data stability bar graph displays in the lower right section of the
screen. This graph helps you determine good or poor data.
• Phase readings with average variations of +/- 2.5 degrees or less are con-
sidered “Good;” otherwise, they are considered “Poor.”
• Magnitude readings with average variations of +/- 5% or less are consid-
ered “Good;” otherwise, they are considered “Poor.”
• Reference Run information can be displayed during trial runs in the lower
right section of the screen, below the data stability graph if you press Dis-
play Ref. Run Data.
• The last trim run information does not display until the first trim run is
complete. This information appears in the lower right section of the
screen, below the stability graph.
The figure below depicts data acquisition beginning. In the following example
Trim Run #1 data is acquired on OBH.

Trim Run 1 data is acquired on OBH

Trim Run 2-113


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 114 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Data Acquisition Function Keys


Accept Data - Press to accept the reading and continue to the Select Measure-
ment Point screen. (you can also press Enter).
Expand Plot Scale - Press to increase the plot scale.
Decrease Plot Scale - Press to decrease the plot scale.
Toggle Direction Rotation – Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent diagram.
Clear Data - Clear the averaged magnitude and phase data. When the data is
cleared the data average starts again.
Display Ref. Run Data - This option is not displayed in Basic Balance Mode or
during the Runout and Reference Run data acquisitions. It is also not displayed
when the job is one that was loaded into the meter from the PC. Toggle between
displaying and not displaying Reference Run information for the selected point.
When selected, the vector information displays on the lower right side of the
screen just below the data stability bar graph.

Toggle the reference run on and off

2-114 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 115 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Display Last Trim Run Data - This option is not displayed in Basic Balance
Mode or during the first trim run. This option is available after the first trim run
reading for the point in question has been acquired. Toggle between displaying
and not displaying the information for the last trim run reading acquired for the
point as shown under the trim run section with this option.
When selected, the vector information displays in the lower right side of the
screen, below the stability graph.

Vector information displays in the lower right side of the screen

Collect data until magnitude is stable and phase varies by no more than 5°. A
data stability bar graph helps you with this. Data in the Good range creates the
best balance solution.
When the data appear to be stable, press Enter or Accept Data.
If you specified Auto for the mux enabled input (when defining the sensor), the
program automatically accepts the data and moves to the next point when both
the phase and magnitude are in the Good range for three consecutive averages.
You can press Enter or Accept Data to force the use of data that is less stable.

Trim Run 2-115


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 116 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
While collecting data, Press Clear Data to clear the averages and
start over.

If you lose the signal from the tachometer transducer, you will get a warning
message. “Waiting for Trigger” displays if, for example, the tach signal is inter-
rupted after starting the acquisition. “Tachometer Timeout” displays if, for
example, no tach signal is present.
If the RPM readings are outside the RPM window (reference RPM ± delta) as
specified in the Tach Configuration Setup screen, a warning message displays.
Any data outside the delta band is automatically excluded from the averages.
If the tachometer readings vary by more than 6% between revolutions, a Tach
Not Stable message displays.
Press Enter or Accept Data to accept this screen and to view acquired data on
the Select Measurement Point screen.

Acquire Trim Data – Tolerance Check


Press Enter or Next Step to advance to the Tolerance Check screen from the
Select Measurement Point screen.

Tolerance Check Operations


The Tolerance Check plot displays all the acquired readings for each point in
each plane separately.

Tolerance Check Options


Balance Spec (as defined under Job Setup)

2-116 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 117 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Job Setup Data Units Definitions:

English Units Metric Units


G’s RMS G’s RMS
G’s Peak G’s Peak
G’s Peak-Peak G’s Peak-Peak
in/sec RMS mm/sec RMS
in/sec Peak mm/sec Peak
in/sec Peak-Peak mm/sec Peak-Peak
mils RMS microns RMS
mils Peak microns Peak
mils Peak-Peak microns Peak-Peak

A diagram in the upper left section of the screen reflects the data acquired rela-
tive to the balance spec. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direc-
tion of rotation are also displayed on the plot.

Note
Compare the diagram to the machine to verify the accuracy of the
supplied information.

The following information also displays on the plot:


• A circle representing the specified balance spec (tolerance) centered on
the plot.
• The symbol for each measurement point at the location of the reference
run reading for that point.
• Lines connecting the reference run reading and up to two additional trim
readings, always using the last two trim run readings, for each measure-
ment point defined for the plane.
The following options display in the lower section of the screen:
• Measurement Point ID (MPT) (as defined under Job Setup)
• Default MPT Symbol for each point (defined under Job Setup)
1st point defined - a square “†”

Trim Run 2-117


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 118 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

2nd point defined - a circle “O”


3rd point defined - an “X”
• Magnitude for the most recent trim run: When the magnitude is equal to
or less than the defined balance spec, the magnitude reading displays in
reverse video (as in the figure on page 2-119). When the magnitude is not
within spec, the magnitude reading is not displayed in reverse video.

Note
If Runout data is subtracted from Job Setup information, the mag-
nitude reading displayed under Tolerance Check also has runout
subtracted. It is important to view collected data with the runout
correction relative to the balance spec.

• % Down (percent of magnitude change) – The relationship (in percent)


between the most recent trim run reading and the initial reading. This
option displays as either a positive or negative numeric integer value
from 0-999.
• % Spec (percent of spec) – The relationship (in percent) between the
most recent trim run reading and the tolerance spec. This displays as a
positive integer numeric value from 0-999.

2-118 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 119 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• In Spec – “Yes” in the In Spec column means the magnitude reading is


within specification. “No” in the In Spec column means the magnitude
reading is not within specification.

Tolerance Check for Trim Run 1

Tolerance Check Function Keys


Expand Scale - Press to increase the plot scale.
Decrease Scale - Press to decrease the plot scale.

Note
Use the Up/Down Arrow as an alternative to zoom in and out.

Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggles the direction of rotation for the current dia-
gram for your convenience.

Note
This option does not change Tach Configuration Setup definitions.

Trim Run 2-119


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 120 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Meas. Plane – Only displays if more than one measurement plane is
defined under Job Setup. This option selects information for the next defined
measurement plane. From the last plane, this option returns you to the first
defined measurement plane.
Press Enter to advance to the Trim Run Status screen where Acquire Trim Data
is complete and the “Proceed to Next Step” option highlighted.

Note
All three steps must be selected and/or completed to complete a
trim run and automatically stores the data. All acquired data is
automatically stored with the balance job after completing the trim
run. The data is not saved, and cannot be transferred to the data-
base for display unless the Trim Run step on the Main Menu is
complete.

Trim Run 1 check-off screen

2-120 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 121 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or the appropriate function key to accept this screen and advance to
the Main Menu. Trim Run 1 is then completed and the number of acquired trim
data runs (1) displays in the top right section of the screen. Notice that the View
Balance Correction step has changed to View Trim 1 Correction and is high-
lighted, and that Trim Run 1 is inactive.

The Main Menu with View Trim 1 Correction marked complete

Since the job is automatically stored in the analyzer and all the steps are com-
pleted, if vibration levels are within acceptable limits you may consider the job
complete. If vibration levels are not within acceptable limits you can continue
with the job.
However, before you can perform additional trim runs you must view and accept
the View Trim 1 Correction. You need all the information available to fix the
problem correctly.

Trim Run 2-121


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 122 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

From View Trim 1 Correction, advance to the Main Menu where Trim Run 2 is
now active and highlighted.

The Main Menu with Trim Run 2 active and highlighted

Select Trim Run 2 to perform any additional trim runs. Every time a new trim
run is started, the two steps (Applied Weight and Acquire Trim Data) are incom-
plete. At the same time, Next Step is inactive.

2-122 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 123 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trim Run 2 check-off screen

The steps required for completing additional trim runs are the same as described
for the first trim run (Trim Run #1). As each trim run is completed, the Trim Run
step on the Main Menu is marked as complete and the number of completed of
trim runs (displayed in the upper right section of the Main Menu) increases.
When Applied Weight or Acquire Trim Data are complete for a trim run, the
Trim Run step is still incomplete. The Trim Run step, as viewed on the Main
Menu (Trim Run 2 in this case), is not marked complete.

Trim Run 2-123


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 124 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trim Run 2 is not marked complete on the Main Menu

For an incomplete Trim Run, any acquired trim data is stored, but not included
in any display outside the Trim Run step. By doing this, you do not have to
include the last set of acquired trim data with the balance job.

2-124 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 125 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The Balance program stores the data for the last eight completed trim runs. If
you select Trim Run after completing the eighth trim run, a message gives you
the choice to perform another trim run or abort the operation.

This message warns you about running more than eight trim runs

If you acquire a new set of trim data and complete the trim run for the new set
of data, the oldest trim run data set is deleted from the job.
If you choose to start a new trim run after completing eight trim runs, the Trim
Run Status screen reads as if Trim Run #8 starts from scratch.

Trim Run 2-125


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 126 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Caution!
After performing eight trim runs, no data is deleted from the job
until after the ninth trim run is complete. You may abort any trim
run once it has started, without deleting data, by returning to the
Main Menu using Reset or Back.

Trim Run 8 check-off screen

2-126 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 127 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Using The Alternate Keys


The Alternate (ALT) keys function outside the recommended program flow.
When available, you can access the ALT functions from any screen.

Note
Unless otherwise noted, the default settings are only used at first.
Once you modify a field, the program defaults to the last entry for
that field.

Note
After completing any step, the program automatically advances to
the next step.

Alternate Key Operation


When alternate key options are available on a screen, “ALT” displays at the top
left and right sides of that screen.

“ALT” at the top right and left corners of the screen tell you that an alternate screen is available

Using The Alternate Keys 2-127


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 128 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press ALT to view the alternate function key utilities (described below).
Only the function keys (F1 - F12) change when you press ALT. Pressing ALT
does not change the image displayed in the center portion of the screen.
If active, function keys perform the associated step or option, and advance the
program to the next screen for that step or option.

ALT Main Menu screen

Alternate Function Keys


Notes – Attach pre-defined and user-defined notes to a job. When selected, you
are advanced to the first screen under Notes. See the Notes section on page
2-197 for more information.
Calculator Mode – Calculate solutions for special circumstances. When selected
you are advanced to the first screen under Calculator Mode. See the Calculator
Mode section on page 2-152 for more information.
Exit Balance – Exit the balance application and return to the analyzer shell.
Review/Edit Data – Review, edit, and enter balance job data manually. When
selected you are advanced to the first screen under Review/Edit Data. See the
Review/Edit Data section on page 2-130 for more information.

2-128 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 129 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Print Job - Prints a summary report of the active job if the Virtual Printer is
enabled.
Clear Job Data – Clear all readings/notes or only the trim run readings from the
active job.

Caution!
Use extreme caution when using the Clear Job Data function when
the job contains important collected balance data. After answering
“Yes” to the warning screen, the data can not be retrieved.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-129


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 130 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Review/Edit Data Key


View, edit, or enter balance job data manually using the Review/Edit Data func-
tion.
This section describes:
• Reviewing Data
• Reviewing Data - Influence Coefficients
• Reviewing Data - Tolerance Check
• Editing Data
• Trial Run Weight Setup - Alternative Method For Editing/Entering Data

Note
Unless otherwise noted, the default settings are only used at first.
Once you modify a field, the program defaults to the last entry for
that field.

Note
The program advances automatically after you complete each step.

Review/Edit Data Operation


There are two basic sections:
1. Review acquired or manually entered data.
2. Edit or enter data.
If active, function keys perform the associated step or option, and advance the
program to the next screen for that step or option.

2-130 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 131 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Reviewing Data
Press Review/Edit Data to access a screen (similar to the figure on page 2-132)
where you can review any acquired or manually entered data. By default the
Reference Run data (Speed1 if more than one speed is defined - Advanced Mode
only) displays first. The layout of this screen is similar to the Select Measure-
ment Point screen under Acquire Data, with no highlighted measurement points.

Review Data Screen Operation


One type of measurement data displays at a time (such as Reference Run, Trial
Run 1, etc.).
The following information displays:
Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup. This is
where the data is collected.
Channel Number as defined under Job Setup. This is the channel
number of the mux assigned to the selected point. The entire
Channel column is not displayed if a mux is set to off for the job.
Speed (RPM) is entered manually or from the tach and expressed in
RPM.
Magnitude is entered manually or from the sensor.

Note
When the magnitude is equal to or less than the defined balance
spec, the magnitude reading displays in reverse video (as in the
example below). When the magnitude is not within spec, the mag-
nitude reading is not displayed in reverse video.

Phase is entered manually or from the tach signal and the sensor,
and expressed in degrees.
A message at the bottom of the screen indicates if Runout compensation is sub-
tracted.

Note
You must be in edit mode to edit or change data.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-131


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 132 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Depending on whether data is stored on the job or not, one of the following two
screens displays when you enter Review Data. Before any data is acquired or
manually entered on any of the measurements, the following screen displays.

This screen displays before data is acquired

2-132 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 133 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If data is entered or acquired for the selected measurement, the following screen
displays.

In this example, data from Reference Run #1 displays

Review Data Function Keys


Select Runout – Only available in Advanced Balance Mode when defined under
Job Setup. When selected, this feature displays the data for the runout run.

Note
Typically, subtract runout is acquired during a slow roll of the rotor
when displacement sensors are used to collect balance data. A slow
roll meaning that the rotor is rotated slow enough so any readings
picked up by the sensors are only due to mechanical irregularities
on the rotor surface and not due to any vibration.

Select Ref. Run - Displays the data for the reference run.

Note
Typically, reference run data is acquired before any trial weights
are placed on or removed from the rotor.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-133


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 134 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Trial Run #1 - When selected, the data for the first trial run displays.
Select Trial Run #2 - Only displays if defined, but when selected, the data for
the second trial run displays.
Select Trial Run #3 - Only available when the balance mode is set to Advanced
and then not unless defined, but when selected the data for the 3rd trial run dis-
plays.
Select Trial Run #4 - Only available when the balance mode is set to Advanced
and then not unless defined, but when selected the data for the 4th trial run dis-
plays.
Exit Review Data – Exit Review/Edit Data and return to the previous screen.
You can also press Enter to return to the previous screen.
Select Trim Run – Displays the data for the last completed trim run.

Note
You cannot review data from previous or incomplete trim runs.

Select Speed – Only available in Advanced Balance Mode when more than one
speed is defined under Job Setup. By selecting a speed, you select a specific set
of data to review and edit.
Select Influ. Coef. / Toler. Check – To review the calculated influence coeffi-
cients, press Select Influ. Coef. This option only displays when trial run data dis-
plays, and then only if all the required data has been acquired. To review the
tolerance check data, press Select Toler. Check. This option only displays when
trim run data displays, and then only if all the required data has been acquired.
See the Reviewing Data - Influence Coefficients section on page 2-136 and the
Reviewing Data – Tolerance Check section on page 2-138 for more information.
Toggle Subtract Runout - Only available in Advanced Balance Mode, when Job
Setup is defined to have runout subtracted, data is acquired for the measurement
displayed, and runout data is acquired. When selected, this option toggles the
data between being displayed with or without runout compensation taken into
account.
Compare the readings with runout subtracted to the balance spec, not the
uncompensated reading. The readings with runout subtracted will help deter-
mine the balance condition of the machine.
Edit Data – Manually enter and edit the data for the displayed measurement.

2-134 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 135 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Reviewing Data - Influence Coefficients


When trial run data displays and all the required data have been acquired, press
Influence Coefficients to display the influence coefficients for the balance job.
Influence coefficients represent the system response at a specific measurement
point and plane to a known force.

Note
You need reference run and trial run data to calculate influence
coefficients.

Influence Coefficients Screen Operation


This display expresses these values in terms of magnitude (RMS) and phase.
This information is for data output only; you cannot edit it.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-135


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 136 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Four columns displayed on the Review Data / Influence Coefficients screen con-
tain the following data:
a. Measurement Plane as defined under Job Setup.
b. Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup.
c. Magnitude as calculated by the program, expressed in RMS.
d. Phase as calculated by the program, expressed in degrees.

Influence coefficients for Trial Run #1

Influence Coefficients Function Keys


Select Review Data – Press to return to the Review Data screen to review addi-
tional data or to exit the Review/Edit Data. You can also press Enter to return to
the Review Data screen.
Select Speed - Only available when the balance mode is set to Advanced and
then not unless more than one speed is defined under Job Setup. This option
allows you to select which speed you wish data to be displayed for.

2-136 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 137 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Reviewing Data - Tolerance Check


When trim run data displays and all the required data have been acquired, press
Tolerance Check to display the tolerance check information for the balance job.

Note
You need all data from a specific trim run to display tolerance
check information.

Tolerance Check Screen Operation


The Tolerance Check plot displays all the acquired readings for each point in
each plane separately.
Options displayed in the upper section of the screen:
a. Balance Spec as defined under Job Setup.
b. Data Units as defined under Job Setup.

English Units Metric Units


G’s RMS G’s RMS
G’s Peak G’s Peak
G’s Peak-Peak G’s Peak-Peak
in/sec RMS mm/sec RMS
in/sec Peak mm/sec Peak
in/sec Peak-Peak mm/sec Peak-Peak
mils RMS microns RMS
mils Peak microns Peak
mils Peak-Peak microns Peak-Peak

A diagram displays in the upper left section of the screen to display the data
acquired relative to the balance spec. The tach (T) location defined for the job
and the direction of rotation (represented by an arrow pointing in the direction
of rotation) are displayed on the plot.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-137


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 138 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information also displays on the plot:


a. A circle representing the specified balance spec (tolerance) centered on
the plot axis.
b. The symbol for each measurement point at the location of the Reference
Run reading for that point.
c. Lines connecting the reference run reading and up to two additional trim
run readings, always using the last two trim run readings, for each measure-
ment point defined for the plane.The following options are displayed in the
lower section of the screen:
a. Measurement Point ID (MPT) – as defined under Job Setup.
b. The default MPT Symbol – for each point defined under job Setup.
i. The 1st point defined - a square “†”
ii. The 2nd point defined - a circle “O”
iii. The 3rd point defined - an “X”
c. Magnitude for the most recent Trim Run –Whenever the magnitude is
equal to or less than the defined balance specification, the magnitude
reading displays in reverse video. Whenever the magnitude is not within
specification, the magnitude reading is not displayed in reverse video.
If a job is set up to display runout data subtracted, the magnitude reading that
displays under Tolerance Check has the runout subtracted. The corrected data is
the information you need to see relative to the balance specification.
d.% Down (percent of magnitude change) - This is the relationship (in per-
cent) between the most recent trim run reading and the initial reading. This
option displays as either a positive or negative numeric integer value from
0-999. The unit for this field is percentage.

2-138 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 139 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

e.% Spec (percent of specification) – This is the relationship (in percent)


between the most recent trim run reading and the tolerance specification.
This displays as a positive integer numeric value from 0-999. The unit for
this field is percentage.
f. In Spec – If the magnitude reading is within specification “Yes” displays
under the “In Spec” column. If the magnitude reading is not within specifi-
cation “No” displays under the “In Spec” column.

Tolerance Check screen

Tolerance Check Function Keys


Expand Scale - Press to increase the plot scale.
Decrease Scale - Press to decrease the plot scale.

Note
Use the Up/Down Arrow as an alternative to zoom in and out.

Toggle Direction Rotation - Allows you to toggle the displayed rotation direc-
tion for the current graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the
rotation direction for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-139


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 140 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
This option does not change what is defined under Tach Configu-
ration Setup.

Select Review Data - Press to return to the Review Data screen to review addi-
tional data or to exit the Review/Edit Data. You can also press Enter to return to
the Review Data screen.
Select Meas. Plane – Only displays if more than one measurement plane is
defined under Job Setup. Selects the next measurement plane defined. From the
last plane defined, when selected it returns you to the first one defined.

Editing Data
The Edit Data function (located on the Runout Run, Reference Run, Trial Run,
or Trim Run Review Data screens) allows you to manually enter or edit speed,
magnitude, and phase information for the displayed measurement. Typically,
these data are modified for “what-if” purposes or to enter data that were not
acquired with this instrument.

Edit Data Screen Operation


The required measurements, as defined for the job, are displayed with the 1st
measurement point defined highlighted as shown below allowing you to either
manually enter or edit the data in that row. In the figure on page 2-142 as an
example, four measurement points have been defined.
Highlight the adjacent row (measurement point) up/down with the Up/Down
Arrow.
The following information displays:
a. Measurement Point ID (MPT) as defined under Job Setup and
cannot be modified from here.
b. Channel Number as defined under Job Setup and cannot be mod-
ified from here. The entire Channel column does not display if a
mux is set to off for the job.

2-140 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 141 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

c. Speed (RPM) as either acquired or manually entered. This field


can be manually entered or edited with a positive numeric integer
value from 0 – 100,000 and is expressed in RPM. If you enter zero
(0), “Unknown” displays for the speed.
d. Magnitude as either acquired or manually entered. This field can
be manually entered or edited with a positive numeric decimal
value from 0.001 – 10,000.

Note
When in the edit mode, any magnitude reading within specification
is not displayed in reverse video as it is under Review Data.

e. Phase as either acquired or manually entered. This field can be


manually entered or edited with a positive numeric integer value
from 0 – 359. This field's units are expressed in degrees.
If data is acquired or entered for the measurement one of the following two
screens are displayed. Initially before any data is acquired or manually entered
on any of the measurement points the following screen displays.

This screen displays before data is acquired

Using The Alternate Keys 2-141


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 142 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If data is entered or acquired for the measurement the following screen displays.

This screen displays after data is acquired

Edit Data Function Keys


Edit Trial Run Weight / Trim Run Weight - “Edit Trial Run Weight” only dis-
plays if trial run data displays. When selected it displays the trial run weight
placement setup screen. “Edit Trim Run Weight” only displays if trim run data
displays. When selected it displays the trim run applied weight setup screen.
Edit Speed - Edit or enter the measurement speed in the highlighted row with a
positive numeric integer value from 0 – 100,000.
Edit Mag. - Edit or enter the magnitude in the highlighted row with a positive
numeric decimal value from 0.001 – 10,000.
Edit Phase - Edit or enter the phase in the highlighted row with a positive
numeric integer value from 0-359. This field's units are expressed in degrees.
Select Review Data - Exit the edit mode and returns you to the Review Data
screen. You can review additional data or exit the Review/Edit Data option from
the Review Data screen. You can also press Enter to return to the Review Data
screen.

2-142 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 143 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The options and screen layouts for both trial and trim run weight edit data are
similar. When editing these screens, the following items display if they are
defined for the job (as shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
A plot, which represents a weight plane with either continuous weight positions
(as shown below) or discrete weight positions (Advanced Mode only)
depending on how the planes is defined under Job Setup.

Weight Setup Screens Operation


A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. Also displayed, the location of the trial weight(s) relative to the reference
mark (represented by a line starting at the center of the XY-axis and extending
to the circle centered on the XY-axis).

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the job
setup and orientation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen,
no more than 12 weight placement positions are displayed on the
screen at one time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a
plane, adjustments necessary to display numbers around the plot
are made to assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:


a. The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only) and can
not be modified here.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-143


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 144 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

b. The amount of the first weight “Weight 1". This field accepts a positive
or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are
defined for the job.
c. The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. This field accepts a pos-
itive numeric integer value from 0 - 359, and is expressed in degrees, if the
plane is defined as a continuous weight plane. This field accepts a positive
numeric integer value from 1 - 100, and is unitless, if the weight plane is
defined as a discrete weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode
only) are indicated with an @ before the number.
d. The amount of the second weight “Weight 2". This field accepts either a
positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's
units are defined for the job.
e. The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. This field accepts a
positive numeric integer value from 0 - 359 and is expressed in degrees, if
the plane is defined as a continuous weight plane. This field accepts a posi-
tive numeric integer value from 1 - 100, and is unitless, if the weight plane
is defined as a discrete weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode
only) are indicated with an @ before the number.
If only one weight plane is defined for the job, the weight setup screen is laid
out as shown in the figure below:

Only one weight plane is defined for this job

2-144 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 145 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter to return to the Trial or Trim Run edit data screens.

One Weight Plane Setup Function Keys


Edit Plane 1 Wt. 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a first weight placed
in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal
value from 0.00 - 10,000. The units for this field are expressed as defined for the
job.
Edit Plane 1 Loc. 1 - Edit or enter the location of the first weight placed in the
specified plane. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0 - 359,
and is expressed in degrees, if the plane is defined as a continuous weight plane.
This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 1 - 100, and is unitless,
if the weight plane is defined as a discrete weight plane. Discrete positions
(Advanced Mode only) are indicated with an @ symbol before the number.
Edit Plane 1 Wt. 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a second weight
placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive or negative numeric
decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 1 Loc. 2 - Edit or enter the location of the second weight placed in
the specified plane. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0 -
359, and is expressed in degrees, if the plane is defined as a continuous weight
plane. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 1 - 100, and is
unitless, if the weight plane is defined as a discrete weight plane. Discrete posi-
tions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated with an “at” symbol (@) before the
number.
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the rotation direc-
tion for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.

Note
This option does not change Tach Configuration Setup definitions.

Select Review Data - Exit the edit mode and return to the Review Data screen,
where you can review additional data or exit the Review/Edit Data option.
Edit Trial Run / Trim Run - Edit Trial Run only displays if the weight setup is
for the trial run. When selected the trial run data screen displays. Edit Trim Run
only displays if the weight setup is for the trim run. When selected the trim run
data screen displays. You can also press Enter to perform this function.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-145


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 146 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If two or more weight planes have been defined for the job, the weight setup
screen is laid out as shown below. If more than three weight planes have been
defined for the job, the program displays Planes 1 and 2 first.

Two weight planes are defined for this job

Two or More Weight Plane Setup Screen Function Keys


Select Weight Plane 3 / Select Weight Plane 3-4 / Select Weight Plane 1-2 –
Only displays if the balance mode is set to Advanced and more than two weight
planes are defined. This option allows you to display the additional planes.
Select Weight Plane 3 displays only if three weight planes have been defined for
the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are displayed. Select Weight Plane 3-4 dis-
plays only if four weight planes have been defined for the job and weight planes
1 and 2 are displayed. Select Weight Plane 1-2 displays only if three or more
weight planes have been defined for the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are not
displayed.
Edit Plane 1 Wt. 1 / Plane 3 Wt. 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a first
weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 1 Weight 1 only displays
if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Weight 1 only displays if more than two
weight planes are defined and the third plane displays. This field's units are as
defined for the job.

2-146 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 147 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 1 Loc. 1 / Plane 3 Loc. 1 - Edit or enter the location of the first weight
placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value
from 0 - 359, with units expressed in degrees, if the plane is defined as a contin-
uous weight plane. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from
1 - 100, and is unitless, if the weight plane is defined as a discrete weight plane.
Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated with an @ symbol
before the number. Edit Plane 1 Location 1 only displays if the first plane dis-
plays. Edit Plane 3 Location 1 only displays if more than two weight planes are
defined and the third plane displays.
Edit Plane 1 Wt. 2 / Plane 3 Wt. 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a
second weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive or neg-
ative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 1 Weight 2 only dis-
plays if the first plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Weight 2 only displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the third plane displays. This field's units are
as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 1 Loc. 2 / Plane 3 Loc. 2 - Edit or enter the location of the second
weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 0 - 359, with units expressed in degrees, if the plane is
defined as a continuous weight plane. This field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 1 - 100, and is unitless, if the weight plane is defined as a dis-
crete weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated with
an @ symbol before the number. Edit Plane 1 Location 2 only displays if the first
plane displays. Edit Plane 3 Location 2 only displays if more than two weight
planes are defined and the third plane displays.
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the rotation direc-
tion for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.

Note
This option does not change Tach Configuration Setup definitions.

Select Review Data - Exit the edit mode and return to the Review Data screen,
where you can review additional data or exit the Review/Edit Data option.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-147


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 148 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Edit Plane 2 Wt. 1 / Plane 4 Wt. 1 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a first
weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 2 Weight 1 only displays
if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Weight 1 only displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays. This field's units
are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 2 Loc. 1 / Plane 4 Loc. 1 - Edit or enter the location of the second
weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 0 - 359, with units expressed in degrees, if the plane is
defined as a continuous weight plane. This field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 1 - 100, and is unitless, if the weight plane is defined as a dis-
crete weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated with
an @ symbol before the number. Edit Plane 2 Location 1 only displays if the
second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Location 1 only displays if more than two
weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays.
Edit Plane 2 Wt. 2 / Plane 4 Wt. 2 - Edit or enter the amount of weight for a first
weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. Edit Plane 2 Weight 2 only displays
if the second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Weight 2 only displays if more than
two weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays. This field's units
are as defined for the job.
Edit Plane 2 Loc. 2 / Plane 4 Loc. 2 - Edit or enter the location of the second
weight placed in the specified plane. This field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 0 - 359, with units expressed in degrees, if the plane is
defined as a continuous weight plane. This field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 1 - 100, and is unitless, if the weight plane is defined as a dis-
crete weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated with
an @ symbol before the number. Edit Plane 2 Location 2 only displays if the
second plane displays. Edit Plane 4 Location 2 only displays if more than two
weight planes are defined and the fourth plane displays.
Edit Trial Run / Trim Run - Edit Trial Run only displays if the weight setup is
for the trial run. When selected the trial run data screen displays. Edit Trim Run
only displays if the weight setup is for the trim run. When selected the trim run
data screen displays. You can also press Enter to perform this function.

2-148 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 149 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trial Run Weight Setup - Alternative Method For Editing/Entering Data


Once the edit mode is activated for a given field (such as Weight 1), press the
Up/Down Arrow to accept the entry for that field and activate the edit mode for
the adjacent field. This reduces the number of steps you need to go through in
order to edit or enter data.
Examples:
If Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #1 was the active field being edited,
press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Weight 1's entry and activate the edit
mode for Location 1 (the second field) under Plane #1.
If Location 1 (the second field) under Plane #1 was the active field being edited,
press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Location 1's entry and activate the edit
mode for Weight 2 (the third field) under Plane #1.
If Weight 2 (the third field) under Plane #1 was the active field being edited,
press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Weight 2's entry and activate the edit
mode for Location 2 (the fourth/last field) under Plane #1.
If Location 2 (the fourth/last field) under Plane #1 was the active field being
edited, press Down Arrow to accept Plane #1 Location 2's entry and activate the
edit mode for Weight 1 (the first field) under Plane #2, if a second plane was
defined for the job. Otherwise, the edit mode for Weight 1 (the first field) under
Plane #1 is activated.

Note
The Up Arrow operates opposite of what is described above.

Note
If a second plane displays, use the Left/Right Arrow to toggle left
and right between fields/planes, accepting the entry in one field
and activating the edit mode in the other just as described for the
Up/Down Arrow.

Note
Press Enter to accept an entry and exit this particular edit mode
operation.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-149


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 150 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The same operations are available for Plane 3 and Plane 4 when
displayed (Advanced Mode only).

2-150 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 151 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Calculator Mode
The Calculator Mode option allows you to calculate solutions for special cir-
cumstances. This option is outside the recommended program flow. Some of the
calculator routines are accessed from the Alternate (ALT) keys and from within
a balance job, while a couple routines are only accessed from within a balance
job.

Select Calculation
This section describes the following calculator mode routines:
• Split Angle
• Sum Weights
• Adjust Fixed Weights
• Static/Couple Analysis
• Estimate Trial Weight (Advanced Mode only)
• Circumference Conversion
• Adjust Radius
• Amplification Factor (Advanced Mode only)
• Units Conversion

Note
Unless otherwise noted, the default settings are only used at first.
Once you modify a field, the program defaults to the last entry for
that field.

Note
After completing any step, the program automatically advances to
the next step.

Calculator Mode Operation


If active, function keys perform the associated step or option, and advance the
program to the next screen for that step or option.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-151


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 152 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Calculation
When the Calculator Mode option is selected, the 1st screen, which allows you
to select the calculation to be performed, displays (as shown below).

The Select Calculation screen

Select Calculation Function Keys


Split Angle – When selected, advances you to the Split Angle calculation. See
the Split Angle Calculation section on page 2-155 for more information.
Sum Weights - When selected, advances you to the Sum Weights calculation.
See the Sum Weights Calculation section on page 2-159 for more information.
Adjust Fixed Weights - When selected, advances you to the Adjust Fixed
Weights calculation. See the Adjust Fixed Weights calculation section on page
2-164 for more information.
Static/Couple Analysis - Only active when two (only two) measurement planes
are defined for the job. When selected, advances you to the Static/Couple Anal-
ysis calculation. See the Static/Couple Analysis calculation section on page
2-168 for more information.

2-152 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 153 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Estimate Trial Weights - Only active when the balance mode is set to Advanced
and then not unless Calculator Mode is accessed from the Trial Run weight entry
screen. When selected, advances you to the Estimate Trial Weights calculation.
See the Estimate Trial Weights Calculation section on page 2-172 for more
information.
Exit Calc. Mode - Exit Calculator Mode and return to the Main Menu or the last
ALT key function. Press Enter to perform the same function.
Circum. Conv. - When selected, advances you to the Circumference Conversion
calculation. See the Circumference Conversion Calculation section on page
2-179 for more information.
Adjust Radius - When selected, advances you to the Adjust Radius calculation.
See the Adjust Radius Calculation section on page 2-183 for more information.
Amp. Factor - Only active when the balance mode is set to Advanced and then
not until after all the required reference run and trial run data is acquired. When
selected, advances you to the Amplification Factor calculation. See the Ampli-
fication Factor Calculation section on page 2-187 for more information.

Note
When this key is not active, it is grayed out. When selected, a mes-
sage informs you that the selected step can only be accessed from
the Trial Run weight entry screen.

Units Conv. - When selected, advances you to the Units Conversion calculation.
See the Units Conversion Calculation section on page 2-190 for more informa-
tion.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-153


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 154 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Split Angle Calculation


In the Split Angle routine you manually enter a known (desired) weight, a
known (desired) angular location, and two available angular locations so the
weight split for the two available angular locations can be calculated. This is
useful when a weight can not be placed where the solution recommends. The
two available angular locations should be close to, and at each side of, the orig-
inal solution’s location. When selected, the following screen displays.

The Split Angle Calculation screen

Split Angle Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Calculate the solution after you have entered the required
information. Press Enter to perform the same operation.
View Balance Corr. – Only displays if a balance correction has been calculated
for the job and if accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu. It is used
to view the last calculated balance correction.

2-154 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 155 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Enter Desired Weight – Enter the desired weight (typically the calculated cor-
rection weight) or import it from the balance correction menu. In the case where
discrete weight positions are defined (Advanced Mode only), discrete positions
are converted to continuous positions. This field accepts a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are unitless unless
the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, then the
units are as defined for the job.
Enter Desired Angle - Enter desired angle (typically the calculated correction
angle) or import the desired angle from the balance correction menu. In the case
where discrete weight positions are defined (Advanced Mode only), discrete
positions are converted to continuous positions. This field accepts a positive
numeric integer value from 0-359. This field's units are expressed in degrees.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen, where you can select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Enter Available Angle 1 / Position 1 - Enter the first available angle position
(entered by you) to place weight. In the case where discrete weight positions are
defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if being imported from the balance cor-
rection menu, the wording changes from Available Angle 1 to Available Posi-
tion 1 so discrete positions defined for the job can be entered. When Enter
Available Angle 1 is active, this field accepts a positive numeric integer value
from 0-359, with units expressed in degrees. When Enter Available Position 1
is active, this field accepts a unitless positive numeric integer value from 1-100,
but limited to what is defined for the job. Discrete positions are indicated with
an @ symbol before the number.
Enter Available Angle 2 / Position 2 - Enter the second available angle position
(entered by you) to place weight. In the case where discrete weight positions are
defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if being imported from the balance cor-
rection menu, the wording changes from Enter Available Angle 2 to Enter Avail-
able Position 2. You can enter the desired discrete positions for the job here.
When Enter Available Angle 2 is active, this field accepts a positive numeric
integer value from 0-359, with units expressed in degrees. When Enter Avail-
able Position 2 is active, this field accepts a unitless positive numeric integer
value from 1-100, but limited to what is defined for the job. Discrete positions
are indicated with the @ symbol before the number.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-155


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 156 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The calculated solution is always displayed in a continuous weight position


format as shown below. The following items are displayed if they are defined
for the job (as shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
The information (for example, Trim Run #1 Weight Plane #1) displayed under
the screen header reflects where the information was imported from and where
it will be exported to, if the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied
Weight menu.
Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
A plot, which will represent a weight plane with either continuous weight posi-
tions (as shown below) or discrete weight positions (Advanced Mode only)
depending on how the plane is defined under Job Setup.

Split Angle Solution Screen Operation


A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. Also displayed, the location of the weight(s) relative to the reference mark
(represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered
on the XY-axis).

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the ori-
entation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen, no more than
12 weight placement positions are displayed on the screen at one
time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, adjust-
ments necessary to display numbers around the plot are made to
assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:

2-156 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 157 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field will either be “Unknown” or it will contain a positive numeric value,
with units expressed as they are defined for the job.
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1." This field's units are as
defined for the job.
• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. Units are expressed in
degrees.
• The amount of the second weight “Weight 2." This field's units are as
defined for the job.
• The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. Units are expressed
in degrees.

The Split Angle Solution screen

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Split Angle Solution Function Keys


Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the rotation direc-
tion for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-157


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 158 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Split Angle Calc. – Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation screen
for this option.
Insert to Trim Weight - Only displays if Calculator Mode was accessed from the
Trim Run Applied Weight entry screen and the calculation is based on a plane
with continuous weight positions defined; otherwise, this key is not active.
Insert to Trim Weight takes the calculated solution and exports it to the Trim
Run Applied Weight entry screen. You are returned the Trim Run Applied
Weight entry screen, where you can continue the balance job.

Sum Weights Calculation


In the Sum Weights routine you manually enter up to three known (desired)
weights and angular locations (also called the correction results) and the pro-
gram calculates the weight sum. This is done when several weights have been
placed on the rotor, and you want to combine some of them. When selected, the
following screen displays.

The Sum Weights Calculation screen

2-158 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 159 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Sum Weights Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Calculate the solution after you have entered the required
information. As an alternative method to this, press Enter to perform the same
operation.
View Balance Corr. – Displays if a balance correction has been calculated for
the job and if accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu. It is used to
view the last balance correction calculated.
Enter Weight #1 - Enter the first weight or import it from the balance correction
menu. This field accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00
- 10,000. This field's units are unitless unless the calculation was accessed from
the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, and then the units are as defined for the job.
Enter Weight #2 - Enter the second weight or import it from the balance correc-
tion menu. This field accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal value from
0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are unitless unless the calculation was accessed
from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, and then the units are as defined for
the job.
Enter Weight #3 - Enter the third weight. This field accepts a positive or nega-
tive numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field's units are unitless
unless the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu,
and then the units are as defined for the job.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen, where you can select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Enter Angle #1 / Position #1 - Enter the first angle position or import it from the
balance correction menu. In the case where discrete weight positions are defined
(Advanced Mode only) and only if being imported from the balance correction
menu, the wording changes from Enter Angle #1 to Enter Position #1 so dis-
crete positions defined for the job can be entered. When Enter Angle #1 is
active, this field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0-359, with units
expressed in degrees. When Enter Position #1 is active, this field accepts a unit-
less positive numeric integer value from 1-100, limited to what is defined for the
job. Discrete positions are indicated with an @ symbol before the number.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-159


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 160 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Enter Angle #2 / Position #2 - Enter the second angle position or import it from
the balance correction menu. In the case where discrete weight positions are
defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if being imported from the balance cor-
rection menu, the wording changes from Enter Angle #2 to Enter Position #2
so discrete positions defined for the job can be entered. When Enter Angle #2 is
active, this field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0-359, with units
expressed in degrees. When Enter Position #2 is active, this field accepts a unit-
less positive numeric integer value from 1-100, limited to what is defined for the
job. Discrete positions are indicated with an @ symbol before the number.
Enter Angle #3 / Position #3 - Enter the third angle value or position. In the case
where discrete weight positions are defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if
the first and second positions were imported from the balance correction menu,
the wording changes from Enter Angle #3 to Enter Position #3 so discrete posi-
tions defined for the job can be entered. When Enter Angle #3 is active, this field
accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0-359, with units expressed in
degrees. When Enter Position #3 is active, this field accepts a unitless positive
numeric integer value from 1-100, limited to what is defined for the job. Dis-
crete positions are indicated with an @ symbol before the number.
The calculated solution is always displayed in a continuous weight position
format as shown below. The following items are displayed if they are defined
for the job (as shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
The information (for example, Trim Run #1 Weight Plane #1) displayed under
the screen header reflects where the information was imported from and where
it will be exported to, if the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied
Weight menu.
Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
A plot that represents a weight plane with either continuous weight positions (as
shown below) or discrete weight positions (Advanced Mode only), depending
on how the plane is defined under Job Setup.

2-160 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 161 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Sum Weights Solution Screen Operation


A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. Also displayed, the location of the weight(s) relative to the reference mark
(represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered
on the XY-axis).

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the ori-
entation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen, no more than
12 weight placement positions are displayed on the screen at one
time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, adjust-
ments necessary to display numbers around the plot are made to
assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:


• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field is “Unknown” or it accepts a positive numeric value. The units are
the same as defined for the job.
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1." The units are the same as
defined for the job.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-161


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 162 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. The units are expressed
in degrees.

The Sum Weights Solution screen

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Sum Weights Solution Function Keys


Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the rotation direc-
tion for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.
Sum Weights Calc. – Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation screen
for this option.
Insert to Trim Weight - Displays if Calculator Mode was accessed from the Trim
Run Applied Weight entry screen and the calculation is based on a plane with
continuous weight positions defined; otherwise, this key is not active. Insert to
Trim Weight takes the calculated solution and exports it to the Trim Run
Applied Weight entry screen. You are returned to the Trim Run Applied Weight
entry screen, where you can continue the balance job.

2-162 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 163 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Adjust Fixed Weights Calculation


In the Adjust Fixed Weights routine, you can enter a known (desired) weight and
angular location (e.g. the correction results), and two available weights manu-
ally. Then the program calculates the angular locations of the two available
weights, to mimic the solution provided by the known weight.
This is useful when the available balance weights do not match the balance or
trim solution. Enter the weights of two available weights and the program will
calculate where to position the weights to achieve the desired effect. When
selected, the following screen displays.

The Adjust Fixed Weights Calculation screen.

Adjust Fixed Weights Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Initiates the calculation of the solution after you enter the
required information. You can also press Enter to perform the same operation.
View Balance Corr. – Only displays if a balance correction has been calculated
for the job and if this calculator mode was accessed from the Trim Run Applied
Weight menu. It is used to view the last calculated balance correction.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-163


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 164 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Enter Desired Weight - Enter the desired weight (typically the calculated correc-
tion weight) or import it from the balance correction menu. When imported
from the balance correction menu, you cannot import the discrete positions
(Advanced Mode only). This field accepts a positive or negative numeric dec-
imal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field is unitless unless the calculation was
accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, then the units are as defined
for the job.
Enter Desired Angle - Enter the desired angle (typically the calculated correc-
tion angle) or import it from the balance correction menu. When imported from
balance correction menu, you cannot import the discrete positions (Advanced
Mode only). This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0-359.
This field's units are degrees.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen to select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Available Weight #1 - This is the first available weight entered. This field
accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This
field is unitless unless the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied
Weight menu, then the units are as defined for the job.
Available Weight #2 - This is the second available weight entered. This field
accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This
field is unitless unless the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied
Weight menu, then the units are as defined for the job.
The calculated solution is always displayed in a continuous weight position
format as shown below. The following items are displayed if they are defined
for the job (as shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
The information (for example, Trim Run #1 Weight Plane #1) displayed under
the screen header reflects where the information was imported from and where
it will be exported to, if the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied
Weight menu.
Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
A plot, which will represent a weight plane with either continuous weight posi-
tions (as shown below) or discrete weight positions (Advanced Mode only)
depending on how the plane is defined under Job Setup.

2-164 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 165 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Adjust Fixed Weights Solution Operation


A diagram in the lower section of the screen reflects changes to the input fields.
The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (repre-
sented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. Also displayed, the location of the weight(s) relative to the reference mark
(represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered
on the XY-axis).

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the ori-
entation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen, no more than
12 weight placement positions are displayed on the screen at one
time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, adjust-
ments necessary to display numbers around the plot are made to
assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:


• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field is “Unknown” or accepts a positive numeric value that is expressed
in units as defined for the job.
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1". This field is expressed in units
as defined for the job.
• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. This field is expressed
in degrees.
• The amount of the second weight “Weight 2". This field is expressed in
units as defined for the job.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-165


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 166 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. This field accepts a
positive numeric integer value from 0 - 359, with units expressed in
degrees.

The Adjust Fixed Weights Solution screen.

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Adjust Fixed Weights Solution Function Keys


Toggle Direction Rotation - Allows you to toggle the displayed rotation for the
current graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the rotation
for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.
Adj. Fxd. Weights Calc. - Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation
screen for this option.
Insert to Trim Weight - Only displays if Calculator Mode was accessed from the
Trim Run Applied Weight entry screen and the calculation is based on a plane
with continuous weight positions defined; otherwise, this key is not active.
Insert to Trim Weight takes the calculated solution and exports it to the Trim
Run Applied Weight entry screen. You are returned to the Trim Run Applied
Weight entry screen, where you can continue the balance job.

2-166 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 167 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Static/Couple Analysis Calculation


This option is only available when two (and only two) measurement planes are
defined for the job. In the Static/Couple Analysis routine you manually enter
two known weights and angular locations (e.g. the correction results) to have the
program calculate the solution such that the static and couple components are
separated. This allows you to calculate the placement of weights to address the
specific effect due to the static and couple components of the imbalance. When
selected, the following screen displays.

The Static/Couple Analysis Calculation screen.

Static/Couple Analysis Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Initiates the calculation of the solution after you have
entered the required information. You can also press Enter to perform the same
operation.
View Balance Corr. – Only displays if a balance correction has been calculated
for the job and if static/couple analysis calculation was accessed from the Trim
Run Applied Weight menu, and two weight planes have been defined for the job.
It is used to view the last calculated balance correction.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-167


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 168 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Plane #1 Weight - This is the calculated correction weight in Plane #1 that you
enter or import from the balance correction menu. When discrete weight posi-
tions are defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if imported from the balance
correction menu, discrete position numbers are converted to continuous position
readings in degrees. This field accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal
value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field has no units unless the calculation was
accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, and then the units are as
defined for the job.
Plane #1 Angle - This is the calculated correction angle in Plane #1 that you
enter or import from the balance correction menu. When discrete weight posi-
tions are defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if imported from the balance
correction menu, discrete position numbers are converted to continuous position
readings in degrees. This field accepts a positive numeric integer value from 0-
359. This field's units are degrees.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen. Select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Plane #2 Weight - This is the calculated correction weight in Plane #2 that you
enter or import from the balance correction menu. When discrete weight posi-
tions are defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if imported from the balance
correction menu, discrete position numbers are converted to continuous position
readings in degrees. This field accepts a positive or negative numeric decimal
value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field has no units unless the calculation was
accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, then the units are as defined
for the job.
Plane #2 Angle - This is the calculated correction angle in Plane #2 that you
enter or import from the balance correction menu. In the case where discrete
weight positions are defined (Advanced Mode only) and only if imported from
the balance correction menu, discrete position numbers are converted to contin-
uous position readings in degrees. This field accepts a positive numeric integer
value from 0-359. This field's units are degrees.
The calculated solution is always displayed in a continuous weight position
format as shown below. The following items are displayed if they are defined
for the job (as shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
The information (for example, Trim Run #1) displayed under the screen header
reflects where the information was imported from and where it will be exported
to, if the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu.

2-168 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 169 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).


Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
A plot, representing a weight plane with either continuous weight positions (as
shown below) or discrete weight positions (Advanced Mode only) depending on
how the plane is defined under Job Setup.

Static/Couple Analysis Solution Operation


For the Static Vector solution, the displayed plot is a generic plot representing a
weight plane with continuous weight positions.
For the Couple Vectors solution, the displayed plot for each weight plane repre-
sents a weight plane with continuous weight positions or discrete weight posi-
tions as defined under Job Setup (as shown below).
A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. Also displayed, the location of the weight(s) relative to the reference mark
(represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered
on the XY-axis).

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the ori-
entation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen, no more than
12 weight placement positions are displayed on the screen at one
time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, adjust-
ments necessary to display numbers around the plot are made to
assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

This information displays in the upper section of the screen:

Using The Alternate Keys 2-169


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 170 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field will either be “Unknown” or it will contain a positive numeric value
expressed in units as defined for the job.
• The calculated weight. This field is expressed in units as defined for the
job.
• The calculated location for the weight. This field is expressed in degrees.

The Static/Couple Analysis Solution screen.

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Static/Couple Analysis Solution Function Keys


Toggle Direction Rotation - Allows you to toggle the displayed rotation direc-
tion for the current graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the
rotation direction for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.
Static/Couple Calc. - Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation screen
for this option.

2-170 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 171 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Insert Static Solution - Only displays if the Calculator Mode was accessed from
the Trim Run Applied Weight entry screens and both weight planes are based on
planes with continuous weight positions defined; otherwise, this key is inactive.
Insert Static Solution takes the calculated Static Vector solution and exports it to
the Trim Run Applied Weight entry screen. You are returned to the Trim Run
Applied Weight entry screen, where you can continue the balance job.

Note
The weight is split evenly between the two weight planes when the
Static Solution is inserted.

Insert Couple Solution - Only displays if the Calculator Mode was accessed
from the Trim Run Applied Weight entry screens and both weight planes are
based on planes with continuous weight positions defined; otherwise, this key is
not active. Insert Couple Solution takes the calculated Couple Vector solution
and exports it to the Trim Run Applied Weight entry screen. You are returned to
the Trim Run Applied Weight entry screen, where you can continue the balance
job.

Estimate Trial Weight Calculation


This option is only available when the balance mode is set to Advanced and the
Calculator Mode is being accessed form the Trial Run weight entry screen. In
the Estimate Trial Weight routine you enter physical data describing the rotor
and along with selected reference run data have the program calculate the trial
weight which is intended to reduce the vibration level due to imbalance. Also,
the heavy and light spots are calculated.

Note
The accuracy of the heavy spot is affected by system lag and sensor
lag. Rotor weight, radius, and amplification factor affect the accu-
racy of the trial weight size.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-171


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 172 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

When selected, the following screen displays:

The Estimate Trial Weight screen.

Estimate Trial Weight Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Initiates the calculation of the solution after you have
entered the required information. You can also press Enter to perform the same
operation.
Select Meas. Plane - Specify the measurement plane (typically the plane nearest
the weight plane) that has the readings you want to use for this calculation. The
default is the first plane defined.
Select Weight Plane - Specify the weight plane (typically the plane nearest the
measurement plane) that has the readings you want to use for this calculation.
The default is the first plane defined.
Enter Rotor Weight - Enter the weight of the rotor in either pounds (English
units) or kilograms (Metric units). This field accepts a positive numeric decimal
value from 0.00 - 100,000. The default is 1.00. This should accept values from
0.01 - 100,000 lbs and 0.00 - 0.00 - 45454.54 kg.

2-172 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 173 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Enter Tr Wght Radius - Enter the radius in either inches (English units) or cen-
timeters (metric units) where the trial weights will be placed on the rotor. This
field accepts a positive numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 650.00 The default is
3.00.
Enter Sensor Lag - Enter the sensor (phase) lag in degrees introduced by the
sensor. This field accepts a positive integer numeric value from 0 - 359. The
default is 0.

Note
For CSI supplied accelerometers, sensor lag is normally 0o.

Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen so either a new calculation can be selected or the Calculation Menu
exited.
Select MPT in Plane - Specify the measurement point(s) in the measurement
plane specified for which the readings are to be used for this calculation. The
default is the first point defined. This field also allows you to select the average
of all readings in a specific measurement plane.

Note
If one measurement point has much higher magnitudes than the
others do, it will often give the best results.

Select Speed - Specify the measurement speed (if more then one is defined) with
the readings that are to be used for this calculation. The default is the first speed
defined.
Enter Amp. Factor - Enter the effect of the mechanical amplification on the
vibration magnitude resulting from a given amount of imbalance. This field
accepts a unitless positive numeric decimal value from 0.0001 - 20.000. The
default is 3.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-173


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 174 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Amplification factors increase as the rotational frequency moves
closer to the critical frequency. Use an amplification factor of 3 if
unknown.

Enter System Lag - Enter the system lag in degrees introduced by the machine
being balanced. This field accepts a positive integer numeric value from 0 - 359.
The default will is 45.

Note
System lag is the difference between the angular location of the
heavy spot and the phase of the vibratory high spot. If system lag
is unknown, use 45 degrees when below 1st critical or 135 degrees
when between 1st and 2nd critical. If running close to critical, use
a number closer to 90 degrees.

The calculated solution displays in either a continuous weight position format


(as shown below) or a discrete weight position format (as defined under Job
Setup). The following items are displayed if they are defined for the job (as
shown below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
• The information (for example, Trial Run #1 Weight Plane #1) displayed
under the screen header reflects where the information was imported
from and where it will be exported to, if the calculation was accessed
from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu.
• Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
• Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
• A plot, which represents a weight plane with either continuous weight
positions (as shown below) or discrete weight positions (Advanced Mode
only) depending on how the plane is defined under Job Setup.

2-174 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 175 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Estimate Trial Weights Solution Operation


A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. The location of the weight(s) relative to the reference mark also displays,
represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered
on the XY-axis.

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the ori-
entation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen, no more than
12 weight placement positions are displayed on the screen at one
time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a plane, the pro-
gram automatically makes adjustments to display numbers around
the plot to assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:


• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field will either be “Unknown” or it will contain a positive numeric value
expressed in units as defined for the job.
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1". This field accepts either a pos-
itive or negative numeric decimal value. This field is expressed in units
as defined for the job.
• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. The field is expressed
in degrees, if the plane has been defined as a continuous weight plane.
The field is unitless if the plane has been defined as a discrete weight
plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated by placing
an @ symbol before the number.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-175


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 176 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The amount of the second weight “Weight 2" (displayed only when dis-
crete weight planes are defined for the job). This field accepts either a
positive or negative numeric decimal value. This field is expressed in
units as defined for the job.
• The location “Location 2" of the second trial weight. This field is
expressed in degrees, if the plane has been defined as a continuous weight
plane. The field is unitless if the plane has been defined as a discrete
weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated
with an @ before the number.
• The calculated Heavy Spot and Light Spot information displays in the
lower right hand section of the screen.

Note
This calculation is only an estimate. The accuracy is greatly influ-
enced by the accuracy of the inputs on the Estimate Trial Weights
Calculation screen, as well as by unaccountable cross-effects in
multi-plane solutions.

The Estimate Trial Weight Solution screen.

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

2-176 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 177 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Estimate Trial Weight Solution Function Keys


Toggle Direction Rotation - Allows you to toggle the displayed rotation direc-
tion for the current graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the
rotation direction for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.
Estimate Trial Wt. Calc. – Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation
screen for this option.
Remove Weight / Add Weight - Toggle between trial weights being removed or
added. The solution defaults to adding weight, making the Remove Weight
option active. When the solution displays removing weight, the Add Weight
option is active. Whenever a weight is to be removed a negative sign (-) is
placed in front of the number.
Trial Weight Units - Toggle the weight units between ounces (oz), grams (gm),
pounds (lb), kilograms (kg), and grains (gr). Since this calculation is accessed
from the Trial Run weight entry screen the weight units defined under Job Setup
are used as the default when this calculation is accessed. If the weight units
under Job Setup are defined to be unitless the default will be ounces (oz.).
Insert to Trial Weight - Only displays if the weight units for the estimated trial
weight is the same as defined under Job Setup; otherwise, this key displays, but
grayed out. Insert to Trial Weight takes the calculated solution and exports it to
the Trial Run weight entry screen. You are returned to the Trial Run weight entry
screen, where you can continue the balance job.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-177


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 178 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Circumference Conversion Calculation


In the Circumference Conversion routine you enter the desired angle and either
the circumference, diameter, or radius of the rotor. Then, the program calculates
the weight location in inches (English units) or centimeters (Metric units)
around the outside circumference of the rotor.
This is particularly useful when the rotor is enclosed and not easily accessible
(for example, when having to work through a small access panel located perpen-
dicular to the rotor’s shaft). In this situation, angular locations can be converted
to allow you to measure around the rotor’s circumference.
When selected, the figure below displays:

The Circumference Conversion Calculation screen.

Circumference Conversion Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Initiates the calculation of the solution after you have
entered the required information. You can also press Enter to perform the same
operation.
View Balance Corr. – Only displays if a balance correction has been calculated
for the job and if accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu. It is used
to view the last calculated balance correction.

2-178 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 179 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Enter Desired Angle - Enter the desired angle in degrees (typically the calcu-
lated correction angle) or import it from the balance correction menu. When
imported from the balance correction menu, you cannot import discrete position
information (Advanced Mode only). This field accepts a positive integer
numeric value from 0 - 359. The default is 0.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen. Here, you can select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Enter Meas. - Enter the rotor circumference, diameter, or radius in either inches
(English units) or centimeters (metric units) for whatever is defined under Mea-
surement Type. This is a positive numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. The
default is 0. This should accept values from 0.00 - 10,000 inches and
0.00 - 25400 cm.
Select Meas. Type - Specify whether the entered measurement value is for the
rotor circumference, diameter, or radius. The default is circumference.
The calculated solution is always displayed in a continuous weight position
format as shown below. The equations for this calculation are:
2

where,

where,

where,

Using The Alternate Keys 2-179


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 180 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
When the meter is set up for metric units, replace “inches” with
“centimeters” for these equations.

If defined for the job, the Analyzer screen reads:


The information (for example, Trim Run #1 Weight Plane #1) dis-
played under the screen header reflects where the information was
located before it was imported.

Circumference Conversion Solution Operation


A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect changes to input
fields. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation (rep-
resented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on the
plot. Also displayed, the location of the weight(s) relative to the reference mark
(represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle centered
on the XY-axis).

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:

2-180 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 181 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The location “Location 1" of the first trial weight. This field is expressed
in inches (English units) or centimeters (metric units).

The Circumference Conversion Solution screen.

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Circumference Conversion Solution Function Keys


Circum. Conv. Calc. – Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation
screen for this option.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-181


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 182 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Adjust Radius Calculation


This option is only available when the balance mode is set to Advanced. In the
Adjust Radius routine you enter a known (desired) weight and radius, and either
an available radius or available weight, and have the program calculate the new
weight for the available radius or the new radius for the available weight. This
is particularly useful when you either don’t have the exact amount of weight
called for by the solution or you are unable to attach the calculated weight at the
original radius the solution was calculated for. In this situation, a new radius can
be calculated to attach a new weight at or vice versa. When selected, the fol-
lowing screen displays:

The Adjust Radius Calculation screen.

Adjust Radius Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Initiates the calculation of the solution after you have
entered the required information. You can also press Enter to perform the same
operation.
View Balance Corr. – Only displays if a balance correction has been calculated
for the job and if the function is accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight
menu. It is used to view the last balance correction calculated.

2-182 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 183 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Enter Known Weight - Enter the desired weight (typically the calculated correc-
tion weight) or import it from the balance correction menu. When imported
from the balance correction menu, importation of the discrete positions is not
allowed (Advanced Mode only). This field accepts a positive or negative
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000. This field’s units are unitless unless
the calculation was accessed from the Trim Run Applied Weight menu, and then
the units are as defined for the job.
Enter Known Radius - Enter the desired radius in either inches (English units)
or centimeters (Metric units) or import it from the balance correction menu.
When imported from the balance correction menu, importation of the discrete
positions is not allowed (Advanced Mode only). This field accepts a positive
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 650.00 inches and 0.00 - 1651 cm.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen to select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Enter Available Weight - Allows you to specify an available weight. This field
accepts either a positive or negative numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 10,000.
This field's units are unitless unless the calculation was accessed from the Trim
Run Applied Weight menu, then the units are as defined for the job. An entry is
not required if an Available Radius is specified.
Enter Available Radius - Allows you to specify an available radius in either
inches (English units) or centimeters (Metric units). This field accepts a positive
numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 650.00 inches and 0.00 - 1651 cm. An entry
is not required if an Available Weight is specified.
The calculated solution is always displayed in a continuous weight position
format as shown below. The equation for this is as follows:

where,

Using The Alternate Keys 2-183


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 184 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The following items are displayed if they are defined for the job (as shown
below); otherwise, they are not displayed:
• Information (for example, Trim Run #1 Weight Plane #1) displayed
under the screen header reflects where the information was imported.
• Radius information, if defined (Advanced Mode only).
• Weight units, if defined (Advanced Mode only).

2-184 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 185 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Adjust Radius Solution Screen Operation


The following information displays in the center of the screen:
• The calculated weight radius: defined as inches (English units) or centi-
meters (metric units).
• The amount of the first weight “Weight 1"; this field's units are as defined
for the job.

The Adjust Radius Solution screen.

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Adjust Radius Solution Function Keys


Adjust Radius Calc. – Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation
screen for this option.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-185


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 186 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Amplification Factor Calculation


This option is only available in Advanced Balance Mode when both reference
run and trial run data have been acquired.
In Amplification Factor, you enter physical data that describes the rotor. The
program calculates the vibration’s amplification by the proximity of a resonance
and the system lag, using selected reference and trial run data.
Machines with amplification factors exceeding six may be difficult to balance.
A resonance close to rotational frequency is the most common cause of this.
System lag reflects the difference between the measured vibratory high spot and
the true rotor heavy spot.
When selected, the following screen displays:

The Amplification Factor Calculation screen.

Amplification Factor Function Keys


Calculate Solution – Initiates the calculation of the solution after you have
entered the required information. You can also press Enter to perform the same
operation.

2-186 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 187 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Meas. Plane - Specify the measurement plane (typically the plane nearest
the weight plane) with the readings you want to use for this calculation. The
default is the first plane defined.
Select Weight Plane - Specify the weight plane (typically the plane nearest the
measurement plane) with the readings you want to use for this calculation. The
default is the first plane defined.
Enter Rotor Weight - Enter the weight of the rotor in either pounds (English
units) or kilograms (Metric units). This field accepts a positive numeric decimal
value from 0.00 - 100,000. The default is 1.00. This should accept values from
0.01 - 100,000 lbs and 0.00 - 0.00 - 45454.54 kg.
Enter Tr Wght Radius - Enter the radius in either inches (English units) or cen-
timeters (metric units) at which the trial weight is to be placed on the rotor. This
field accepts a positive numeric decimal value from 0.00 - 650.00 inches and
0.00 - 1651 cm. The default is 3.00.
Enter Sensor Lag - Enter the sensor (phase) lag in degrees introduced by the
sensor. This field accepts a positive integer numeric value from 0 - 359. The
default is 0.
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen, where you can select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu.
Select MPT in Plane - Specify the measurement point(s) in the selected mea-
surement plane with the readings you want to use for this calculation. The
default is the first point defined. An option to use the average of all readings in
a specific measurement plane is also available.
Select Speed - Specify the measurement speed (if more then one is defined) with
the readings you want to use for this calculation. The default is the first speed
defined.
Select Trial Run - Specify the trial run with the readings you want to use for this
calculation. The default is the first trial run defined.

Note
A trial run must be specified where a weight was added to the spec-
ified weight plane.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-187


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 188 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trial Weight Units- Specifies the units of the trial weight. Toggle the weight
units between ounces (oz), grams (gm), pounds (lb), kilograms (kg), and grains
(gr) with this key. If the weight units are unitless, the default is ounces (oz).

Amplification Factor Solution Operation


The following information displays in the center of the screen:
• The Amplification Factor.
• The System Lag: expressed in degrees.

The Amplification Factor Solution screen.

Enter is inactive on this screen. Pressing it from this screen does nothing.

Amplification Solution Function Keys


Amp. Factor Calc. – Exit the solution screen and return to the calculation screen
for this option.

2-188 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 189 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Units Conversion Calculation


This option is only available when the balance mode is set to Advanced. In the
Units Conversion routine you enter magnitude, Engineering (magnitude) units,
units type, frequency, and frequency units and have the program calculate the
units in acceleration, velocity, and displacement units. When selected, the fol-
lowing screen displays.
Information that you entered is located on the left-hand side of the screen while
the calculated solution is located on the right-hand side of the screen.

The Units Conversion Calculation screen.

Units Conversion Function Keys


Enter Mag. - Specify the magnitude of the vibration units that will be converted
to other vibration units. This field accepts a positive numeric decimal value
from 0.00 - 100,000.
Select Mag. Units - Specify the vibration units of the vibration magnitude you
entered using the Enter Mag. feature to use for this calculation. You can express
the vibration units in g's, in/sec, mils, and g’s (m), mm/sec, microns.

Using The Alternate Keys 2-189


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 190 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
For English units, use g’s. For metric units, use g’s (m).

Select Units Type - Specify the type of units for the entered frequency that is to
be used for this calculation. You can express units in RMS, Peak, and Peak-to-
Peak.
Enter Freq. - Specify the frequency of the spectral feature with the magnitude
that will be converted by this calculation. This field accepts a positive numeric
decimal value from 0.01 - 100,000.
Select Freq. Units - Specify the frequency units of the frequency number you
entered using the Enter Freq. feature, to use for this calculation. You select
between hertz (Hz) and RPM (also referred to as CPM).
Select Calc. Menu – Exit the calculation and return to the Select Calculation
screen. You can select a new calculation or exit the Calculation Menu from this
screen.
Select Units Type (Acceleration) - Specify the units type of the calculated solu-
tion for Acceleration. You select between RMS, Peak, and Peak-to-Peak. The
default is RMS.
Select Units Type (Velocity) - Specify the units type of the calculated solution
for Velocity. You select between RMS, Peak, and Peak-to-Peak. The default is
Peak.
Select Units Type (Displacement) - Specify the units type of the calculated solu-
tion for Displacement. You select between RMS, Peak, and Peak-to-Peak. The
default is Peak-to-Peak.
The calculated correction solution contains the following information:
• The calculated solution for Acceleration.
• The calculated solution for Velocity.
• The calculated solution for Displacement.

2-190 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 191 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

View Balance Correction


Under View Balance Correction you can view the last balance correction calcu-
lated, depending on the calculation and the status of the balance job. Before any
trim runs are acquired, this is the initial balance correction. After each trim run
is completed, this is the balance correction for the last trim run.
Setup for the View Balance Correction screen(s), displayed below, are similar
to what is described under the View Balance Correction and Trim Run options
accessed from the Main Menu.

View Balance Correction Operation


If any of the required Reference and Trial Run information and readings is
missing, you will not be able to access this section.
A diagram displays in the lower section of the screen to reflect the calculated
correction. The tach (T) location defined for the job and the direction of rotation
(represented by an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation) are displayed on
the plot. The location of the trial weight(s) relative to the reference mark also
displays, represented by a line starting at the XY-axis and extending to the circle
centered on the XY-axis.

Note
When a discrete weight plane is defined, the number of each posi-
tion defined displays on an XY diagram to assist you with the job
setup and orientation. Due to the resolution of the analyzer screen,
no more than 12 weight placement positions are displayed on the
screen at one time. When more than 12 positions are defined for a
plane, adjustments necessary to display numbers around the plot
are made to assist you with the setup and orientation.

Note
The diagram is extremely useful when compared to the machine
for verifying the accuracy of the supplied information.

The following information displays in the upper section of the screen:

Using The Alternate Keys 2-191


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 192 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• The weight radius as defined for the job (Advanced Mode only). This
field is “Unknown” or accepts a positive numeric value with units as
defined for the job.
• The first calculated weight “Weight 1." The units are as defined for the
job.
• The first calculated location “Location 1" of the first calculated weight.
The units are expressed in degrees, if the plane is defined as a continuous
weight plane. The units are unitless if the plane is defined as a discrete
weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are indicated by
placing an @ before the number.
• The second calculated weight “Weight 2." The units are as defined for the
job.
• The second calculated location “Location 2" of the second calculated
weight. The units are expressed in degrees, if the plane is defined as a
continuous weight plane. The units are unitless if the plane is defined as
a discrete weight plane. Discrete positions (Advanced Mode only) are
indicated with an @ before the number.
• If only one weight plane has been defined for the job, the balance correc-
tion screen will be laid out as shown below:

The Balance Correction screen.

2-192 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 193 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

View Balance Correction Function Keys (one weight plane)


Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent graphical display for your convenience. This key controls the rotation direc-
tion for all plots displayed, if more than one displays.
Return - Exit the Balance Correction screen and return to the Calculation screen
without inserting the balance correction.
Remove Weight/Add Weight – Tells the program if correction weights are being
added or removed. The display for this key toggles between Remove Weight and
Add Weight, with each press of the key. The Balance Correction defaults to Add
Weight.
Insert Weight Plane 1 – Takes the balance correction for the displayed weight
plane (Weight Plane 1 in this case), and inserts it into the calculation replacing
any previous correction data. You are then returned to the calculation screen.
This key is not displayed if discrete weight positions are defined and the calcu-
lation does not allow you to insert information from discrete weight positions.
It is also not displayed for the Static/Couple calculation.

Note
The Adjust Fixed Weights, Circumference Conversion, and Adjust
Radius calculations do not allow information from discrete weight
positions to be inserted, if defined (Advanced Mode only).

Using The Alternate Keys 2-193


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 194 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The figure below depicts a balance corrections screen with two defined weight
planes. The program default displays Planes 1 and 2 first.

The Balance Correction screen with two defined weight planes.

View Balance Correction Function Keys (two or more weight planes)


Select Weight Plane 3 / Select Weight Plane 3-4 / Select Weight Plane 1-2- Only
displays when the balance mode is set to Advanced and more than two weight
planes are defined. With this option, display the additional planes, if defined.
Select Weight Plane 3 displays only if three weight planes have been defined for
the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are displayed. Select Weight Plane 3-4 dis-
plays only if four weight planes have been defined for the job and weight planes
1 and 2 are displayed. Select Weight Plane 1-2 displays only if three or more
weight planes have been defined for the job and weight planes 1 and 2 are not
displayed.
Toggle Direction Rotation - Toggle the displayed rotation direction for the cur-
rent screen for your convenience. This key controls the rotation direction for all
plots displayed, if more than one displays.
Return - Exit the Balance Correction screen and return to the calculation screen
without inserting the balance correction.

2-194 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 195 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Remove Weight/Add Weight – Tells the program if correction weights are being
added or removed. The display for this key toggles between Remove Weight and
Add Weight, with each press of the key. The Balance Correction defaults to Add
Weight.
Insert Weight Plane 1 / Insert Weight Plane 3 - Takes the balance correction for
the displayed weight plane (Weight Plane 1 or 3) and inserts it into the calcula-
tion replacing any previous correction data. You are then returned to the calcu-
lation screen. This key is not displayed if discrete weight positions are defined
and the calculation does not allow you to insert information from discrete
weight positions. It is also not displayed for the Static/Couple calculation. Insert
Weight Plane 1 only displays if Weight Plane 1 displays and Insert Weight Plane
3 only displays if three or more weight planes have been defined for the job and
Weight Plane 3 displays.

Note
The Adjust Fixed Weights, Circumference Conversion, and Adjust
Radius calculations do not allow you to insert information from
discrete weight positions, if defined (Advanced Mode only).

Insert Weight Plane 2 / Insert Weight Plane 4 / Insert Weight Plane 1-2 – Takes
the balance correction for displayed weight plane(s) and inserts it into the cal-
culation replacing any previous correction data and returns you to the calcula-
tion screen. This key is not displayed if discrete weight positions are defined and
the calculation does not allow information from discrete weight positions to be
inserted. Insert Weight Plane 2 only displays if Weight Plane 2 displays and
Insert Weight Plane 4 only displays if four or more weight planes have been
defined for the job and Weight Plane 4 displays. Insert Weight Plane 1-2 dis-
plays only if the View Balance Correction option is accessed from the Static/
Couple calculation. In this case, the information from both Weight Planes 1 and
2 are inserted into the calculation (Advanced Mode only).

Note
The Adjust Fixed Weights, Circumference Conversion, and Adjust
Radius calculations do not allow information from discrete weight
positions to be inserted, if discrete weights positions are defined
(Advanced Mode only).

Using The Alternate Keys 2-195


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 196 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Notes

Add Notes

To attach a note to a piece of equipment, press Notes from the Balance Applica-
tions screen.
The notes function lets you record specific comments about the equipment that
you might not be able to remember later. You can record observations about the
equipment that you are monitoring. Once you have added the note to the job, it
is saved and dumped into your RBMware database with the job. You can store
up to 40 notes on each job.

Add Notes Options


Next Group – Toggle to the next group of predefined notes. You can modify
your predefined notes in RBMware.
User Notes – Brings you to a screen of user-defined notes you have created. You
can then select a note from that list. If you have no User Notes, you can use this
screen in order to create them. Press Create User Note and type in the maximum-
32 character note.

2-196 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 197 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Add to Job – Adds the highlighted note to the job.


Delete Note – Removes the highlighted note from the assigned notes list for the
job.
Clear All Notes – Clears all notes you have attached to the job.
Previous Group – Allows you to toggle to the previous group of predefined
notes.
Note Up/Down Arrows – Scroll through the list of predefined notes.
Stored Up/Down Arrows – Scroll through the list of stored notes on the job.

How Do I ...

Add a note?
First, identify the note you want. Press Next Group/Prev Group to toggle
through different note groups, and then highlight the note you want with Note
Up/Down. Press Add to Job to add the note to the job.

Delete a note?
Use Stored Up/Down to highlight the note you want to remove from the
assigned notes list. Press Delete Note to erase that note from the job.

Clear all of my notes?


Press Clear All Notes.

Write my own note?


Press User Notes to create your own note if no predefined note is suitable. Then
press Create User Note.
Create User Note opens a keyboard screen where you can type a note. You are
allowed a maximum of 25 user-defined notes. If the maximum of 25 stored
notes is reached, the analyzer forces you to delete a note before you can add a
new note.
Notes assigned to a job may be observed and/or modified at any time the job is
active in the balance application.

Notes 2-197
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 198 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
User defined notes stay stored in memory until deleted. They are
not removed when balance jobs are deleted.

2-198 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 199 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Print Job
The Print Job soft key will generate a summary report of the current job, if the
Virtual Printer is enabled in the General Setup of the System Firmware. To
verify the Virtual Printer setting, Press the Home key, then the Alt key, and then
the General Setup key. The F6 soft key will allow the operator to change the Vir-
tual Printer setting. The current setting is displayed next to the F6 soft key.
The summary report will include only the initial set of readings (if a job was
downloaded to the 2130 Analyzer, then this is the first new set of readings) and
the last set of readings. The summary report will be similar to the following:
6

Print Job 2-199


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 200 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

2-200 Using the Balance Program


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 3

RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer

Introduction
RBMcom is the Machinery Health Manager based communications program
that allows you to connect to a host computer or network in order to download
or upload programs or data.

Note
You must have Machinery Health Manager 4.8 or greater to have
RBMcom. Your computer or network must be running Windows
2000 or later.

Note
Windows NT 4.0 will communicate only by ethernet or RS232
(serial).

Communications between the Model 2130 and a host computer or network can
be achieved through an Ethernet card and cable (not supplied), a USB cable
(supplied), or a special 25- to 9- pin communications cable (not supplied). The
fastest way of transferring data is through the Ethernet connection and the
slowest way is the 25- to 9- pin communications cable. The most common and
easiest connection, however, will be through the USB.
RBMcom is also necessary if you want to upload the latest firmware to your
analyzer. Firmware includes such items as the Route and Balance programs.
You can connect to the computer or network from the analyzer. This is a more
involved process, but will be discussed toward the end of the chapter.

3-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Selecting a Device Name


Selecting a device name is a unique way to identify your 2130 analyzer from a
co-worker’s 2130 analyzer.

Home screen

Starting from the Home screen:


1 ···· Press Comm Setup. The Communications Setup screen appears.
2 ···· Press Change Device Name. The Device Name Edit dialog box appears.
Use the F1 - F12 keys to type in the device name.

3-2 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Each key is associated with 4 characters. To enter something other
than the first character, press the function key multiple times
quickly until that character appears. For example, to enter the char-
acter “E,” press the F2 key twice. To enter the number “9,” press
the F11 key four times quickly.

Device Name Edit dialog box

Note
For additional text tools, press ALT and a different set of characters
and text tools appears. Use ALT to toggle between these two sets.

3·····When finished, press Enter.


4·····Press Enter again to return to the Home screen.

Selecting a Device Name 3-3


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The device name can only be seen from the RBMcom application
once the analyzer is connected and the analyzer is attached. A
dialog box appears showing the meter names that are attached.
Select the appropriate meter and click ok.

3-4 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Connecting using USB, Serial, or Ethernet


Communications between the analyzer and network can only take place if you
properly set up the analyzer to communicate by USB, Ethernet, or Serial. The
three sections below take you through the steps needed to set up the analyzer for
each mode of communication.

Note
The analyzer can only communicate using one method at a time.
Therefore, you will need to reconfigure the analyzer should you
switch from one method to another. For example, from USB to
Ethernet.

Connecting using USB, Serial, or Ethernet 3-5


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

USB Connection
Installing the USB Driver
The first time you hook your 2130 to your computer using the USB cable and
ports, you will need to load the appropriate driver.

Note
Before you begin, make sure you have administrator rights on your
computer. You will need to have Windows administrator rights for
the driver to successfully load. If you are not sure, check your Win-
dows help or check with your IS department.

3-6 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

1·····Connect the analyzer and computer. Plug one end of the cable into the
analyzer’s USB slave port and the other end into the computer’s USB
port.

Bottom of the analyzer

2·····If the analyzer is turned off, press Power.


A dialog box appears on your computer screen indicating Windows has detected
a new device plugged into the USB port.

Found New Hardware dialog box

USB Connection 3-7


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Next, an installation Wizard screen appears to guide you through the process.

Found New Hardware Wizard screen

3 ···· Click the Next button to begin the driver installation process.

Installing Driver screen

The Wizard will ask you where the driver can be found.

3-8 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The driver can be found in one of three places:


A····On your Machinery Health Manager install CD in a folder entitled
Drivers.
B····If a stand alone Machinery Health Manager has been installed on your
computer, you will also find the folder Drivers inside the folder called
RBMsuite. RBMsuite should be on your local hard drive (usually
designated as C:\).
C····If you are running a network version of Machinery Health Manager, the
folder Drivers may be located on the server computer housing the
RBMsuite folder. If running a network version of the software, you will
be set up as a client on your local computer.

Note
If you change the USB port you plug into, you will be prompted to
go through the installation wizard again. This will happen even if
you plug into a different USB port on the same computer. There-
fore, it is recommended that when you are loading the driver, you
plug the 2130 into all your computer’s USB ports and load the
driver onto all the USB ports.

USB Connection 3-9


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Using the USB Option


USB is the most convenient method of hooking the analyzer to a computer or
network. Below is brief review of setting up the analyzer. For details, please see
Chapter 3 of the 2130 User’s Manual.

Home screen

3-10 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Starting from the Home screen:


1·····Press Comm Setup. The Communications Setup screen appears.

2·····Press Set Connect Port. The Connection Port dialog box appears.

Connection Port dialog box

3·····Press Up/Down until USB is highlighted.


4·····Press Enter to save your selection.
5·····Press Enter again to return to the Home screen.

USB Connection 3-11


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Serial Port Connection

Home screen

Brief review of setting up Serial connection


The serial connection will be made with the model 639 serial cable.

3-12 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Starting from the Home screen:


1·····Press Comm Setup. The Communications Setup screen appears.

2·····Press Set Connect Port. The Connection Port dialog box appears.

Connection Port dialog box

3·····Use Up/Down until Serial Port is highlighted.


4·····Press Enter.
5·····Press Set Baud Rate.

Baud Rate dialog box

6·····Use Up/Down to highlight the correct baud rate. This rate must match the
baud rate set in RBMcom.
7·····Press Enter again.
8·····Press Power to turn off the 2130.
9·····Follow the instructions below on connecting the serial cable to the
analyzer and the computer.

Serial Port Connection 3-13


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Connecting the 25- to 9-pin serial communications cable


A special 25- to 9-pin communications cable (Model 639) is used to connect the
analyzer with the host computer when using the serial port. Connect the male
end of this cable to the multifunction input connector on top of the analyzer and
the female end to the COM port on the computer (Normally COM1).

2130 (left) serial port connecting to computer using communications cable.

If the host computer uses a 25-pin COM port, you must use an optional 9- to 25-
pin adapter between the computer and the Model 639 communications cable.

2130 (left) serial port connecting to computer using cable and 25-pin adapter.

3-14 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
If using the serial port connection, the normal Machinery Health
Manager setup requires the use of COM1 using the IRQ4 interrupt
line.

10···Once the hook up is complete, turn the 2130 back on.

Serial Port Connection 3-15


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Ethernet Card Connection

Note
The Ethernet card and cable must be purchased separately. You
will also need an Ethernet port or hub in order for this connection
option to work.

Note
Use only CSI approved accessories.

The Ethernet connection will be composed of three parts: the analyzer, the
Ethernet card and cable, the network cable.

Home screen

3-16 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Brief review of setting up Ethernet connection


Below is a brief description of the steps to set up communication between the
analyzer and a computer or network. For details see Chapter 3 of the 2130
User’s Manual.

Starting from the Home screen:


1·····Press Comm Setup. The Communications Setup screen appears.

2·····Press Set Connect Port.


3·····Press Up/Down to highlight Ethernet Card. The Connection Port dialog
box appears.

Connection Port dialog box

4·····Press Enter.
5·····Press Setup Ethernet.
6·····Press Disable / Enable DHCP to select either Disable DHCP or Enable
DHCP.

If you select Enable DHCP:


7·····Press Enter.

Ethernet Card Connection 3-17


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
A dialog box appears saying that you will need to turn off the ana-
lyzer, then turn it back on for the changes to take effect.

8 ···· Press Enter again, then press Power to turn off the 2130.
9 ···· Insert the card in the top slot of the card bay on the bottom of the 2130.
The Ethernet card works only in the top slot.
10 ·· Plug the Ethernet cable into the connection to the card and into the
Ethernet plug or hub.
11 ·· Press Power to turn the 2130 back on.

If you select Disable DHCP, you will need Set IP Address, Set Sub Mask, and
the Gateway.
7a ·· Press Set IP Address. The F1 – F12 function keys become number keys
and a red square appears around the first space in the IP Address line.
8a ·· Use the number keys and enter the correct number(s). When the correct
number(s) are entered, press Right Arrow to move to the next space.
9a ·· Repeat step 8a for the second position. Then repeat it for the next two
positions.
10a When finished, press Enter.You return to the Communications Setup/
Ethernet Setup screen.
11a· Press Set Sub Mask. The F1 – F12 function keys become number keys
and a red square appears around the first space in the Sub Mask line.
12a Repeat steps 8a – 10a above.
13a Press Set Gateway. The F1 – F12 function keys become number keys and
a red square appears around the first space in the Gateway line.
14a Repeat steps 8a – 10a above.

3-18 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
A dialog box appears saying that you need to turn off the analyzer,
then turn it back on for the changes to take effect.

15a·Press Enter again, then press Power to turn off the 2130.
16a·Insert the card in the top bay of the card slot on the bottom of the 2130.
The Ethernet card works only in the top slot.
17a·Plug the Ethernet cable into the connection to the card and into the
Ethernet plug or hub.
18a·Press Power to turn the 2130 back on.

Other items to consider


Make sure you have assigned a name to your analyzer and that you have selected
the correct host name. For details on setting these up see Chapter 3 of the 2130
User’s Manual.

Ethernet Card Connection 3-19


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Setting up Host Information


If you are going to be connecting to a network, you will need to set up host infor-
mation. Some of the information may need to be provided by your Information
Services (IS) or Information Technology (IT) department.

Home screen

Note
Your Ethernet settings are dependant on your local networks. You
will need information and assistance from your IS or IT depart-
ment.

3-20 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Starting from the Home screen:


1·····Press Comm Setup. The screen changes to the Communications Setup
screen.
2·····Press Set Host Info. The Host Information dialog box appears.

Host Information dialog box

Setting up Host Information 3-21


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

3 ···· Press Set Host Name. The Edit Host Name dialog appears. Use the F1 –
F12 keys to type in the name of the host computer.

Edit Host Name dialog box

Note
The host name is the network name of the computer where
RBMcom resides. If your network includes a DHCP server (DHCP
enabled), then enter this name. Otherwise enter the IP Address of
the host computer.

Note
For additional text tools, press ALT and a different set of characters
and text tools appears. Use ALT to toggle between these two sets.

3-22 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

4·····When finished, press Enter to save your name change. The Set Host Info
dialog box reappears.
5·····Press Set IP Address. The Host Information dialog box appears with Host
IP Address highlighted. Use the F1 - F12 keys to type in the number. Press
Left/Right to move between the four number blocks.

Host Information dialog box with Host IP Address highlighted

6·····When finished, press Enter to save your changes. The Set Host Info dialog
box appears.

Setting up Host Information 3-23


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

7 ···· Press Set Host Port. The Host Information dialog box appears with Host
Port ID highlighted. Use the F1 - F12 keys to type in the number.

Caution!
Change the host port ID only if directed to do so by CSI customer
support In most cases you will not have to make changes to the host
port ID. Therefore, unless directed to change the host port ID, you
can skip this step.

Host Information dialog box with Host Port ID highlighted.


Change this only if directed to do so by CSI customer support.

8 ···· When finished, press Enter to save your changes. The Set Host Info dialog
log appears.
9 ···· Press Enter again to return to the Home screen.

3-24 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Understanding RBMcom

RBMcom with 2130 analyzer connected

RBMcom allows you to communicate with the 2130 analyzer. Using this soft-
ware program you can download routes and jobs into the analyzer and upload
route data and job data from the analyzer to Machinery Health Manager.

Note
You must have Machinery Health Manager 4.8 or greater in order
to connect using RBMcom.

Understanding RBMcom 3-25


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

RBMcom Overview
RBMcom has several features that you can use to help load and transfer your
data. Below is a brief description.

Menu Bar
File – From the File menu you can:
• Select Analyzer – select the analyzer you are trying to communicate with.

Select Analyzer, CSI2130 list

Note
The RBMCONSULTANT Pro (2130) is the only analyzer available at
this time.

• Options – allows you to override setups made in the software.

Options list

3-26 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Load Setup (Route Program Only)


Sensor Sensitivity – Select to override Senor Sensitivity settings. You will need
to check the box(es) by the sensor(s) you want to override. You can then enter
the new sensitivity levels in the New Value column. You do this if you want to
take readings at a different level than those previously set.

Note
This option has no effect on the Analyze and Balance programs.

Note
The Load Setup / Sensor Sensitivity is session based. The new
value(s) will only be in effect until settings are changed by the user
or RBMcom has been re-started.

Load Setup

Understanding RBMcom 3-27


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
If you put a check mark in the Provide Sensor Power, you will
either have to put a check mark in the box under the Default
column or a check mark in the box under the New value column.
If you do not put a check mark in either of these two boxes or if
you put a check mark in both of these boxes, no sensor power will
be provided.

Data Dump Setup (Route Program Only)


Select this option to change the way certain parts of the route data is sent from
the analyzer to the database. You can setup both Data Dump Options and Auto-
Analyze Options.

Note
This option has no effect on the Analyze and Balance programs.

3-28 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The Data Dump Setup options are session based. The new value(s)
will only be in effect until settings are changed by the user or
RBMcom has been re-started.

Data Dump Options dialog box with some of the options selected

Normally, Route data dumps to the correct database without user interaction.
Sometimes, though, you might want to force route data to a currently active
database. In this case, certain restrictions can be relaxed.
Data Dump Options tab – allows you to pre-set options describing how you
would like the data collected by the analyzer to be sent back to the database.
Valid Date Range – Allows you to adjust the minimum and max-
imum date ranges for the data being dumped. That way, if the data
falls outside the default date range, it can still be dumped.

Understanding RBMcom 3-29


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Automatic Date/Time Substitution – Put a check mark in this box


in order to substitute a date and time for the one recorded in the
route data. Once checked, you can then type in the substituted date
and time.
Save data flagged bad sensor – To dump data collected by a bad
sensor, put a check in this box.
Save data flagged bad reading – To dump data labeled by the ana-
lyzer as bad reading(s), put a check mark in this box.
Save Route Trend data – To dump data labeled by the analyzer as
trend data, put a check mark in this box.
Save Route Spectra – To dump data labeled by the analyzer as
spectra data, put a check mark in this box.
Save Route Waveform – To dump data labeled by the analyzer as
waveform data, put a check mark in this box.

Auto-Analyze Options dialog box

3-30 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Auto-analyze tab – allows you to select to automatically launch either Export or


Nspectr when dumping data from the analyzer to the database. You can check
mark one or both boxes.
If you select one of the options under Send Output, once the data is reviewed by
either Export or Nspectr, it will be sent to either a printer or to a disk file. You
do not have to select any of these options, and you can select Export, Nspectr,
or both and not select Printer or Data File.

Understanding RBMcom 3-31


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

User Preferences
Allows you to adjust items dealing with RBMcom and the 2130 by using the
four tabs.
General tab

User preferences, General tab selected, options checked

Show “Route Load” button in Machinery Health Manager view –


Put a check mark in the box beside this text to have the Route Load
screen button appear. You use this button when loading routes and
jobs to the analyzer. You can use this button in place of simply drag-
ging and dropping route points and jobs from the software database
to the analyzer. To make the button disappear, uncheck the box.
Show “Data Dump” button in analyzer view – Put a check mark in
the box beside this text to have the Data Dump screen button
appear. You use this button when uploading data from the analyzer
to the database. You can use this button in place of simply dragging
and dropping data from the analyzer to the software database. To
make the button disappear, uncheck the box.

Note
The default setting is enabled (checked).

3-32 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

2130 Directories tab

User preferences, 2130 Directories tab selected

Key Table – Use this to select the location where the Key Table folder is located.
You will use this directory to download a new key table, which is required to
activate a new feature.
Firmware – Use this to select the location where the Firmware folder is located.
You will use this directory to download new firmware. New firmware versions
can add new features to the analyzer.
Work Dir. – Use this to select the location where the Work folder is located. You
will use this directory to download new route files.
The work directory is where the route files go when each new file is loaded into
the meter. This can be manually set by the user or will default to the RBM-
suite\User directory.
Output Files
Delete Intermediate route files after load – check the box beside
this line if you want intermediate route and job files to be deleted.
If left unchecked, these files will remain in your system taking up
hard drive space. However, these files can be helpful if you have
problems loading route and job files into your analyzer.

Understanding RBMcom 3-33


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Delete Intermediate data files after dump – check the box beside
this line if you want intermediate data files to be deleted. If left
unchecked, these files will remain in your system taking up hard
drive space. However, these files can be helpful if you have prob-
lems transferring data files to your database.
RBMcom Srvr Settings tab

RBMcom Server Settings tab selected

RBMcom Srvr Settings – Use this to point RBMcom to the server you want to
upload data to or download data from. If connecting to your own computer, you
will probably type in “localhost” in the “NetAdmin Server Name” box.

3-34 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Communication Setup tab


Use this to make available communications options between the analyzer and
RBMcom.

RBMcom Communication Setup tab selected

Supported Communications – Check marks indicate if USB,


Ethernet, and RS232 are supported by the computer. You cannot
turn these options off or on.
Available Communication – Indicates which means of communica-
tion is available or unavailable between RBMcom and the analyzer.
To make a means available, click to place a check in the box beside
USB, Ethernet, or RS232 (serial). You can activate more than one
means of communication. If RS232 is selected, you will also need
to select the Port ID and Baud Rate for this communication. When
a means of communication is also available, the word “available”
appears after the means.

Note
If communicating using the serial port, use the highest possible
baud rate your computer and RBMcom allows.

Understanding RBMcom 3-35


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• Exit – Select to exit RBMcom.


View – The default is for Toolbar, Status Bar, and Output Window to be active
when RBMcom is launched. Click beside Toolbar, Status Bar, or Output
Window to have each one hidden or displayed. A check mark beside an item
means it is being displayed.

Note
The View menu also shows how many RBMcom windows are
open and places a check mark beside the one that is active

View drop down box

Help
• About RBMcom – Tells you about the version of RBMcom that you’re
running

Toolbar
The Toolbar has many of the same functions as the Menu bar.
RBMCONSULTANT Pro – Displays the way the analyzer can be connected to the
computer or network: USB, Ethernet, or Serial. These are the same options as
described above in the Menu bar section.

RBMCONSULTANT Pro drop menu

3-36 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

This drop menu shows what is supported and what is available. For example, if
USB is supported and available, it will say “Supported/Available” beside the
USB icon. If a USB port has not been set up to work with the analyzer, it will
say “Supported/Unavailable” beside the USB icon.
If you need to change the settings, go to the Communications tab; you can then
make changes to the setting under Available Communication. Once the changes
are made there, they are reflected in this drop down menu.
Attach Analyzer / Detach Analyzer – Click on this to connect or disconnect an
analyzer.

Note
You can also attach an analyzer by right clicking on the mouse
from the analyzer window on the right side of the RBMcom screen.
To detach an analyzer, right click on the analyzer window.

Options – These are the same options as described above in the Menu bar sec-
tion.
• Route Load Setup
• Data Dump Setup
• User Preferences

Understanding RBMcom 3-37


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Machinery Health Manager Databases / Analyzer / Data Files


RBMcom allows you to download routes and jobs directly to your analyzer and
allows you to upload that data to your computer. In addition, RBMcom allows
you to download route and job files to a folder on your computer. It also allows
you to upload data files from your analyzer to a folder.

RBMcom with 2130 analyzer connected

3-38 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

To switch to a data files window, click on the Data Files tab at the bottom of a
window. When selected, a Windows Explorer type window appears.

RBMcom screen with Data Files tab selected

You can now look for a folder either to download data from or upload data to.
For details, see “Uploading Data Files from the Analyzer to a Selected Folder”
on page 3-53.

Understanding RBMcom 3-39


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Creating a Route File and copying it to a Folder


1 ···· With the RBMcom screen open select the RBMcom Databases tab on the
left side and select the Data Files tab on the analyzer (right) side.

RBMcom screen with RBMcom Databases tab selected on the left


and Data Files tab selected on the right.

2 ···· On the Data Files side, highlight the folder you want to send the Route
File to.
3 ···· Next, select the file you want to move from the RBMcom Databases side
to the Data Files side.
4 ···· Drag the file from the RBMcom Database side to the Data Files side. A
dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you want to copy a file
from the Database side to the folder on the Data Files side. If the
information in the dialog box is correct, click the Yes button. If it is
incorrect, click the No button.

3-40 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Confirmation dialog box.

5·····Select Yes and another dialog box appears showing the file being copied.

Loading Routes dialog box.

When finished, the updated route and job files can be now be viewed from either
Data Files tab.

RBMcom screen with the Data Files tab selected on both sides.

When route and job files are created this way, they load faster into the analyzer.

Understanding RBMcom 3-41


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Copy the data file from the analyzer to a folder selected from the Data Files
menu. The analyzer can now be disconnected. The data file can now be seen
from either Data Files view. You can drag and drop the file to the database or e-
mail the data file to another site for analysis.

Note
For more information on e-mailing Route and data files, please
contact CSI customer support.

3-42 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom


RBMcom gives you several options when uploading and downloading jobs
from the analyzer to the computer.

Downloading Balance Jobs with RBMcom


1·····First, make sure you have set up your analyzer to the computer or network
communications as described under “Connecting using USB, Serial, or
Ethernet” on page 3-5.

From the computer


2·····From the computer, launch Machinery Health Manager.
3·····Click on the RBMcom icon. The RBMcom screen will open.

Note
If you are downloading from a network, it will ask you for a user
name or password. If you are downloading from a local host (com-
puter), you will not be asked for a user name or password. A list of
databases appears on the left side of the screen under the computer
icon. From these databases you can select the routes to be down-
loaded to the analyzer by expanding the tree node.

From the analyzer (USB connection method selected)


4·····Turn the analyzer on.
5·····Press Home.
6·····From the Home screen, press Balance.
7·····Press Job Manager.
8·····Press Connect for Transfer.

Note
The Connect for Transfer option must be used before any commu-
nications can take place between the analyzer and the computer.

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-43


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

From the computer


9 ···· If the analyzer is connected via USB or Serial, the analyzer automatically
connects to RBMcom.

Analyzer connected to RBMcom, right side of screen

10 ·· In the left-side window pane the computer icon displays a list of


databases. Click on the database where the Job is you want to load into
the analyzer. You may have to expand both the database and area parts of
the tree before reaching the job.

Analyzer connected to RBMcom, left side of the screen

3-44 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

11···Drag the job from the left-side pane to the right-side pane. You will have
a confirmation asking if this the job you want to load. Select Yes to
continue or No to stop the process. Repeat this step until all the jobs you
want to load are loaded onto the analyzer.

Note
If there is no corresponding job in the database you selected, the
database tree should say No Jobs Defined. You will then need to
select the correct database or area and try again.

Note
You can also highlight the job you want to load and select the Job
Load button or right click and send it to the analyzer or folder.

Note
To load multiple jobs into the analyzer, select the job, hold down
the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard and select additional jobs.
When all the jobs have been selected, just drag and drop to the ana-
lyzer window of the RBMcom screen.

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-45


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

12 ·· When finished, right click in the right-side window. A dialog box appears.
This time, select “Detach Analyzer” or press Back on the analyzer to
disconnect from the computer.

Note
You can also go under the Toolbar, click on the icon for the RBM-
CONSULTANT Pro. A drop menu appears. Select the “Detach Ana-
lyzer” icon. The analyzer will still show that it is connected. Press
Back to disconnect or unplug the USB cable. A message appears
on the analyzer indicating it has been disconnected. Press Enter to
continue.

13 ·· Press Power to turn off the analyzer, and then disconnect the analyzer
from the computer or network. You are now ready to go collect data.

3-46 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If the analyzer has been disconnected from RBMcom


You can go under the Toolbar, click on the icon for the 2130. A drop menu
appears.
1·····Click on the “Attach Analyzer” icon. The Analyzer Selection dialog box
appears showing the list of analyzers you can select from.

Analyzer Selection dialog box

Note
The Analyzer Selection dialog box appears even if there is only
one analyzer connected.

2·····Double-click on the analyzer you want to connect to. The Analyzer dialog
box disappears and an icon representation of the analyzer appears in the
right-side window pane along with a list of any routes or jobs already in
the analyzer. If there are no routes or jobs, the window will show this.

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-47


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Uploading Job Data using RBMcom


Job Data is balance information you have created and saved using the Balance
application. Using RBMcom, you can upload the data back to the database.
1 ···· First, make sure you have set up your analyzer to the computer or network
communications as described under “Connecting using USB, Serial, or
Ethernet” on page 3-5.

From the computer


2 ···· From the computer, launch Machinery Health Manager. At the login
screen, fill in the prompts.
3 ···· Click on the RBMcom icon. The RBMcom screen will open.

Note
If you are downloading from a network, it will ask you for a user
name or password. If you are downloading from a local host (com-
puter), you probably will not be asked for a user name or password.
A list of databases appears on the left side of the screen under the
computer icon.

From the analyzer


4 ···· Turn the analyzer on.
5 ···· Press Home.
6 ···· From the Home screen, press Balance.
7 ···· Press Job Manager.
8 ···· Press Connect for Transfer.

Note
The Connect for Transfer option must be used before any commu-
nications can take place between the analyzer and the computer.

3-48 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

From the computer


9·····If the analyzer is connected via USB or Serial, the analyzer automatically
connects to RBMcom.

Analyzer connected to RBMcom, right side of screen

10···In the left-side window, the computer icon displays a list of databases.
Click on the database containing the Job you want to load into the
analyzer. You may have to expand both the database and area parts of the
tree before reaching the Job.

Analyzer connected to RBMcom, left side of the screen

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-49


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

11 ·· In the right-side window pane the computer icon displays a list of the jobs.
Click and hold on the job you want to copy from the analyzer to the
computer or network database.
12 ·· Drag the job from the right-side pane to the left-side pane. A database list
dialog box appears. Select the database you want to transfer the job to.

Database List dialog box

Note
By pressing the Shift key on the computer keyboard, you can select
several jobs at once to drag over. If you do, you are prompted if you
want all of them to go to the same database. If you say so, all the
jobs will be copied to the same database.

13 ·· When finished, right-click in the right-side window. A dialog box


appears. This time, select “Detach Analyzer” or press Back on the
analyzer to disconnect from the computer.

3-50 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
You can also go under the Toolbar, click on the icon for the RBM-
CONSULTANT Pro. A drop menu appears. Select the “Detach Ana-
lyzer” icon. The analyzer will still show that it is connected. Press
Back to disconnect or unplug the USB cable. A message appears
on the analyzer indicating it has been disconnected. Press Enter to
continue.

14···Press Power to turn off the analyzer, and then disconnect the analyzer
from the computer or network. Your jobs have been transferred into the
selected databases.

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-51


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If the analyzer has been disconnected from RBMcom


You can go under the Toolbar, click on the icon for the 2130. A drop menu
appears.
1 ···· Click on the “Attach Analyzer” icon. The Analyzer Selection dialog box
appears showing the list of analyzers you can select from.

Analyzer Selection dialog box

Note
The Analyzer Selection dialog box appears even if there is only
one analyzer connected.

2 ···· Double-click on the analyzer you want to connect to. The Analyzer dialog
box disappears and an icon representation of the analyzer appears in the
right-side window pane along with a list of any routes or jobs already in
the analyzer. If there are no routes or jobs, the window will show this.

3-52 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Uploading Data Files from the Analyzer to a Selected Folder


RBMcom allows you to upload Data Files to a folder. This option allows you to
move files from one folder location to another.
1·····First, make sure you have set up your analyzer to the computer or network
communications as described under “Connecting using USB, Serial, or
Ethernet” on page 3-5.

From the computer


2·····From the computer, launch Machinery Health Manager, and fill in any
login prompts as needed.
3·····Click on the RBMcom icon. The RBMcom screen will open.

Note
If you are downloading from a network, it will ask you for a user
name or password. If you are downloading from a local host (com-
puter), you probably will not be asked for a user name or password.
A list of databases appears in the left side of the screen under the
computer icon.

From the analyzer


4·····Turn the analyzer on.
5·····Press Home.
6·····From the Home screen, press Balance.
7·····Press Job Manager.
8·····Press Connect for Transfer.

Note
The Connect for Transfer option must be used before any commu-
nications can take place between the analyzer and the computer.

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-53


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

From the computer


9 ···· If the analyzer is connected via USB or Serial, the analyzer automatically
connects to RBMcom.

Analyzer connected to RBMcom, right side of screen

10 ·· At the bottom of the left hand window, select the Data Files tab. The
window changes to a Windows Explorer tree that shows folders where
you can dump your data.

RBMcom screen with Data Files tab selected (left hand side)

3-54 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

11···Select the folder you want to copy the Data File to.
12···Drag and drop the data from the analyzer to the location you want to
upload the data to. A dialog box appears.

Confirmation dialog box.

13···Confirm that the folder you highlighted is the correct folder by selecting
Yes. If this is not the correct folder, select No.

Dialog box showing Data Files being transferred


after Yes option selected.

14···After the transfer is complete, a list of the transferred .rte and .dat files
appears in the folder.

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-55


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

List of route, job, and data files transferred from analyzer to Data Files folder.

3-56 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If the analyzer has been disconnected from RBMcom


You can go under the Toolbar, click on the icon for the 2130. A drop menu
appears.
1·····Click on the “Attach Analyzer” icon. The Analyzer Selection dialog box
appears showing the list of analyzers you can select from.

Analyzer Selection dialog box

Note
The Analyzer Selection dialog box appears even if there is only
one analyzer connected.

2·····Double-click on the analyzer you want to connect to. The Analyzer dialog
box disappears and an icon representation of the analyzer appears in the
right-side window pane along with a list of any routes or jobs already in
the analyzer. If there are no routes or jobs, the window will show this.

Transferring between Machinery Health Manager Databases and Data

Uploading and Downloading with RBMcom 3-57


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Files

RBMcom screen with Data Files tab selected (right hand side)

You can transfer data files from the local computer to the network or to another
folder on your hard drive using the Data Files tab on the right hand side of the
screen. Select it and a Windows Explorer window appears.
You can also transfer data from a location selected on the right hand side to the
Machinery Health Manager Database on the left hand side of the screen.
For this procedure, you do not need to have the analyzer connected. Simply
launch RBMcom from the main menu, then select the Data Files tab in the right
hand window.

Note
Data files cannot be loaded back into the analyzer.

3-58 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Connecting Using the Analyzer


While RBMcom is probably the best way to connect and transfer data between
the analyzer and Machinery Health Manager, data transfer can also be accom-
plished using the analyzer. RBMcom does have to be launched, but you do not
have to use it. Below are brief descriptions of how to upload data using the ana-
lyzer as the “master” for getting the information from the analyzer to the data-
base.

Downloading a Job Using the Analyzer


You can download a job from the analyzer without having to directly use a com-
puter or RBMcom. You will need to use either an Ethernet card or USB cable
and have the ability to hook up to an Ethernet connection or USB port. You will
also need to have the analyzer configured for USB, Ethernet, or Serial connec-
tion as described in “Connecting using USB, Serial, or Ethernet” on page 3-5.

Connecting Using the Analyzer 3-59


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Once the USB, Ethernet, or Serial connection is established,


1 ···· Press Home to return the analyzer to the Home screen.
2 ···· Press Balance.
3 ···· Press Job Manager.
4 ···· Press Connect for Transfer. The analyzer will attempt to make connection.
When a connection has been made, the PC Communications screen
appears with the words “Status: Connected” appearing on the analyzer’s
screen.

“Status Connected” in the center of the PC Communications screen tells you that the analyzer
connected successfully

5 ···· Press Load Jobs. The screen changes to show the Login screen.

3-60 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Login Screen

Note
For USB connections this screen is bypassed because the meter
automatically attaches to RBMcom.

6·····Type in the Company Name, User Login Name, and Password using the
F1 - F12 function keys, or press Recall Login and type in a PIN code to
recall the information, provided you have already stored it in the
analyzer’s memory. When finished, the Select Database and Area screen
appears.

Connecting Using the Analyzer 3-61


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The User Login Name is the only field required. This is the same
user name that was set up for the user from the RBM Network
Administration application in Machinery Health Manager.

Highlight the database and area you want and press Select Area

8 ···· Press Database Up and Down to select the database. Then press Select
Area.

3-62 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 63 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
If multiple servers are available you will see Select Server keys.
Press Up and Down to select the server you want, and then press
Select Server.

8·····Press Area Up and Down to highlight the area where the jobs are located
that you want to download. Press Select Area.
9·····The screen changes to show the jobs under that area.

Choose the jobs you want by pressing Select

10···Scroll by pressing Job Up and Down to highlight the job you want to
select.
11···Press Select. This places a check mark by the job you want to download.

Connecting Using the Analyzer 3-63


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 64 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The checkmark next to a job indicates it is selected to load

12 ·· Repeat steps 10 and 11 until all the jobs you want to download are
highlighted and selected.
13 ·· Press Load Jobs.
14 ·· When finished, the Select Database and Area screen appears. At this
point, you can select jobs or you can press Back or Reset to disconnect.

3-64 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 65 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Uploading Data Using the Analyzer


You can also upload data to a database file from the analyzer without having to
directly use a computer or RBMcom. You will need to use a USB connection or
an Ethernet card and have the ability to hook up to an Ethernet connection. You
will also need to have the analyzer configured for USB or Ethernet connection
as described in “Connecting using USB, Serial, or Ethernet” on page 3-5 and
you will also have to have the Host Information set up in the analyzer.
Once the USB or Ethernet connection is established,
1·····Press Home to return the analyzer to the Home screen.
2·····Press Balance.
3·····Press Job Manager. The analyzer attempts to make connection. When it
connects, the PC Communications screen appears with the words “Status:
Connected” at the center of the screen.

“Status Connected” in the center of the PC Communications screen tells you that the analyzer
connected successfully

Connecting Using the Analyzer 3-65


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 66 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Press Set Storage Location to change where the dumped jobs are
located. You can only change the location if additional storage is
available.

4 ···· Press Dump Data. The Login screen appears.

Login Screen

5 ···· Type in the Company Name, User Login Name, and Password using the
F1 - F12 function keys, or press Recall Login and type in a PIN code to
recall the information, provided you have previously stored it in the
analyzer’s memory. When done, you will be taken back to the Dump Data
screen. When finished, the Select Data to Dump screen appears.

3-66 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 67 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select Data to Dump from this screen

6·····Use Data Up and Down to highlight the data you want to upload. This
places a check mark by the data you want to download.
7·····Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all the data you want to upload are highlighted
and selected.

Connecting Using the Analyzer 3-67


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 68 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Select to put a check next to the jobs you want to dump. Then press Begin Data Dump.

8 ···· Press Begin Data Dump. If the job(s) selected for transfer have database
assignments, they are dumped when you press Begin Data Dump.
Otherwise, the Select Database and Area Screen appears, and you must
choose a location to dump your jobs.

3-68 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 69 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The Select Database and Area screen appears if your jobs do not have database assignments.

Note
If you wish to change the database assignments (dump the jobs to
a different database), select the job(s) you want to have assign-
ments changed for then press Clear Database Info.

9·····If the Select Database and Area screen displays, press Database Up and
Down to select the database.

Connecting Using the Analyzer 3-69


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 70 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
If multiple servers are available, you will see Select Server keys.
Press Up and Down to select the server you want, and then press
Select Server.

10 ·· Press Area Up and Down to highlight the area you want to place the job.
Then press Select Area. Pressing Select Area dumps the selected jobs to
that area.
11 ·· When dumping is finished, the PC Communications screen appears. At
this point, you can initiate another job transfer or press Back or Reset to
disconnect.

3-70 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 71 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Updating the Base Firmware


Upon occasion you may want to update the base firmware of the analyzer. To
update, you will need to have the correct directory selected under “2130 Direc-
tories” and “RBMCom Srvr Settings.” See details on page 3-34. RBMcom
Server should be set to the location housing the updated firmware. This could
be a CD or a folder on a directory in the C:\ (or other) hard drive.
1·····Hook up either the USB cable or the serial cable to the analyzer and
computer.
2·····Start Machinery Health Manager and launch 2130 Data Transfer
(RBMcom). RBMcom must be running.
3·····With the analyzer off, press the lower left ALT and Power. Hold them
down until the analyzer turns on. The CSI Special Functions Menu
appears.

2130 Analyzer Special Functions screen)

Updating the Base Firmware 3-71


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 72 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

From here you can press the F1 function key to learn about Bootload, F2 to
update the firmware using the USB connection, or F3 to update firmware using
the serial connection.
3 ···· Press F2 or F3. The analyzer tries to connect to the computer. Once the
connection is made, the firmware begins updating.

Note
If the computer’s operating system is Windows NT, you have to
press F3 to load firmware through the serial port connection.

4 ···· When done the analyzer shuts itself off. You can now turn it back on and
begin using it.

Note
If the analyzer gets stuck trying to make connection, press Power
to turn the analyzer off. You can then try again. At this point, you
may have to load new applications before you can use the analyzer.

3-72 RBMcom and Other Communications with the Analyzer


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 4

Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode

Overview
This section shows screen displays and explains of procedures used in a typical
balance job. You need an Analyzer to perform all procedures. For overviews and
specific instructions about using UltraMgr, refer to the UltraMgr User’s Manual.

Example Machine

4-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Beginning the Balancing Procedure


This section creates a sample job from scratch. You may not need to complete
every step for every job. Use this example as a guide to help you complete your
balance jobs.

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when
working around rotating machinery.

Balance Job Setup


The Main Menu is the first screen you see in the Balance Program.

Main Menu for Balance Program

To create a new balance job, go to the Job Manager and select Create New Job.
When you create a new balance job, the Job ID is set to a default and the Equip-
ment ID is blank. There are no notes or acquired trim data. None of the Job
Status brackets [ ] are checked.

4-2 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Job Description to define the equipment being balanced. The Job Descrip-
tion screen displays.

Insert figure for job description.

You can either leave the Job ID at the default or edit it to something you can
remember. Entering a unique Job ID helps you remember and identify the job
later. You may define the rest of the entries if you want, but this step is not
required.
Complete the job description and press Enter or Reset to return to the Main
Menu.
You can begin the first steps in the balance procedure once you finish the Job
Description.
The balance procedure consists of four steps (Job Setup, Acquire Data, View
Balance Correction, and Trim Run).

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-3


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or Job Setup to identify the balance job parameters. The Job Setup
screen displays.

Job Setup 1

Job Setup consists of several screens. On the first screen, define the overall job
parameters in the upper section and tachometer configuration and speed param-
eters in the lower section.

Note
If the Balance Mode is set to Basic, press Balance Mode to toggle
to Advanced and continue.

Press Enter Balance Spec. to enter a target number against which to compare
results. You do not have to complete this step.
It is not required to enter a unit of weight at the Weight Units field. However, it
provides you with a reference throughout the job.
We use ounces (oz) for this example. You must fill in the rest of the fields. The
information in these fields creates a data matrix for the balance procedure.
Change the fields and any other options described throughout this section as you
like.

4-4 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Unless otherwise noted, the defaults are used for this example. The program
defaults to a two weight plane, two measurement plane, four measurement point
job.

Note
Balance accepts up to four weight planes, eight measurement
planes, eight measurement points, and six speeds. However, the
number of measurement points times the number of speeds cannot
exceed 24.

The program defaults to a 0o tachometer angular location and counter-clockwise


(CCW) direction of rotation. This setting controls the default display used by all
diagrams.
The Tach Angle field recreates this setup later and establishes the relationship
between all sensors. Measure the angle in degrees counter to rotation from TDC
(top dead center). A line and “T” marks this location on all diagrams. If needed,
press Tach Configuration to make any required modifications. For this example,
the tach angle changes to 90o.
Speed is entered in revolutions per minute (RPM). The program defaults to a
single “Unknown” speed and a zero (0) Delta RPM. Use this value as a reference
for future setup.
When determining data validity, it is also used as the baseline speed for applying
the delta RPM criteria. If multiple speeds are specified, one input is requested
for each balance speed. This helps you identify the acquired speed data.
Speed is not used in calculating the balance correction. Delta RPM determines
the acceptable range for RPM during data acquisition. Enter “0” to disable RPM
checking.
The reference speed plus/minus the Delta RPM form the window for speed val-
idation. If needed, press Speed Setup to make changes. For this example, the
speed changes to 1800 RPM.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-5


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Job Setup 2.

Compare the screen to your machine to verify setup. Press Enter to advance to
the Measurement Plane Setup screen(s) and begin the next step.

4-6 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Measurement Plane #1, Setup 1

Define the parameters for each measurement plane in the upper section of the
Measurement Plane Setup screen.
Define the sensor parameters in the lower section of the Measurement Plane
Setup screen.
You must define measurement points (one minimum, three maximum) for each
measurement plane. Set up Measurement Plane #1 first.
The program default has two radial measurement points (IBH, located at 270o;
and IBV, located at 0o) in Measurement Plane #1.
Press Toggle Direction Rotation to change the plot rotation temporarily. Look at
the location of the measurement points (MPTs) on the diagram. The direction of
rotation for the plot has defaulted to Tach Configuration definitions.
Change the TDC angle of the horizontal sensor to 90o. Highlight the measure-
ment point with the Up/Down Arrow and press Enter MPT Angle to make the
change. Press Enter to accept the change and return to the measurement plane
setup screen.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-7


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The default setup for the balance sensor is shown in the lower section of the
screen. Configure the sensor setup according to the vibration sensors you use
and the display units you want.
For this example, the job uses an accelerometer with a sensitivity of 0.1 volts
per g. The sensor’s output displays as displacement (PK-PK). Sensor power is
On; this means power is supplied to the transducer from the Analyzer.
Turn the mux Enabled field On because you are using the Model 648 4-channel
mux. The input channel controls the multiplexer when the mux is set to On or
Auto. Otherwise, the input channel simply reminds you of the correct inputs.
Set the Subtract Runout field to No, because you are not using proximity probes.
At this point, you do not want to have the shaft runout measured and subtracted.
The default bandwidth is set to 0.1 (10%). The bandwidth of the filter is the fre-
quency of the machine turning speed peak multiplied by the bandwidth param-
eter.

4-8 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The machine turning speed is 1800 RPM and the bandwidth parameter is 0.10.
The filter bandwidth is 180 RPM or +/- 90 RPM for this example. Therefore, the
range in which frequency components are not attenuated is 1710–1890 RPM. A
more narrow filter (lower numerical value) attenuates frequency components
that are close to the machine turning speed; however, more time is needed for
the analyzer to take a measurement.

Measurement Plane #1

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-9


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Look at the position of the reference pick-up (T) on the diagram. When all
entries are complete, compare the diagram to the machine to verify the setup.
Press Enter to accept the setup for this plane and advance to the next measure-
ment plane.

Measurement Plane #2, Setup 1

Measurement Plane #2 is configured the same as Measurement Plane #1, except


for the Measurement Point IDs (OBH and OBV) and channel (CH) specifica-
tions.

4-10 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The sensor parameters display in the lower section of this screen. Only one
sensor type can be defined for a balance job. If you change the sensor type infor-
mation for any Measurement Plane, the information changes for all Measure-
ment Planes.

Measurement Plane #2, Setup 2

Compare the diagram to the actual machine to verify your setup. Press Enter to
advance to the Weight Plane Setup screen(s).
Define the parameters for each weight plane on the Weight Plane Setup screens.
The setup for Weight Plane #1 is first.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-11


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Job Setup Weight Plane #1, Setup 1

The program defaults to continuous weight positions and an “Unknown” weight


placement radius. Press Toggle Discrete Contin. to toggle the weight positions
field to discrete if the weight plane has preset weight positions, such as bolt
holes or fins.
Discrete positions must be uniformly spaced around the circumference of the
rotor at a common radius. The program uses this information to automatically
split weights for the balance correction.
Entering a Weight Placement Radius field is not required, but it provides you
with a reference throughout the job.
For this example, weight positions for the first weight plane remain continuous
and the Weight Placement Radius field changes to 24 inches. To make the
change, press Enter Weight Radius. Press Enter to accept the change and return
to the setup screen for the weight plane.

4-12 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The direction of rotation for the plot defaults to the Tach Configuration defini-
tion. Press Toggle Direction Rotation to change the plot rotation temporarily.

Job Setup Weight Plane #1, Setup 2

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-13


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

When all entries are complete, compare the diagram to the machine to verify the
setup. Press Enter to accept the setup for this plane and advance to the next
weight plane.

Job Setup Weight Plane #2, Setup 1

Weight Plane #2 is configured the same as Weight Plane #1. In this example, the
second weight plane has discrete weight positions.
Press Enter Number Positions and set 12 positions. The first position is located
0o from the tach reference mark on the rotor.
The numbers of the positions increase with the direction of rotation.
For this weight plane, change the Weight Placement Radius to 36 inches.

4-14 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Use the diagram to verify the positions increase in the correct direction and that
the first position is correctly located from the Tach reference (T).

Job Setup Weight Plane #2, Setup 2

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-15


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter to accept the setup for this plane and advance to the Main Menu.
After the Job Setup is completed, the program returns to the Main Menu.

Main Menu--Job Setup is complete.

The [X] after Job Setup tells us it is complete. The next step, Acquire Data, is
highlighted.

4-16 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquire the Balance Data – Reference (as-is) Run


After you complete Job Setup, you are ready to acquire the balance data you
need to calculate a balance solution. To begin, either press Enter to accept the
highlighted selection “Acquire Data” or Acquire Data to start data acquisition.
The Select Measurement screen is displayed.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement.

Acquire Data consists of several screens. On the first screen, select the measure-
ment for which to acquire data. None of the brackets [ ] are checked complete.
This is a 2-plane balance job, so data must be acquired from a reference run and
two trial runs.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-17


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Begin with the reference run. The Reference Run is highlighted, so press Enter
or Acquire Ref. Run Data to advance to the Select Measurement Point screen.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

A selection list displays the four specified measurement points.


The program leads you through each logical step. If you use a Model 648 mux,
the correct channel is automatically used for each measurement. Otherwise, be
sure the correct signal input is attached before continuing.
The first measurement point is already highlighted, so press Enter to accept the
highlighted section or Start Data Acq. to begin collecting data. Each time refer-
ence data is acquired at an MPT (measurement point), an overall vibration mea-
surement is acquired first.

Caution!
If the CSI Model 648 mux is not used, verify that the proper cables
are connected before beginning data acquisition for each measure-
ment point.

4-18 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

These data are compared to the vibration at the rotational frequency (1xRPM).
You are alerted if the energy at 1x is less than half the total vibration. The elec-
tronics are always auto-ranged before a measurement to establish the best
dynamic range for the input signal.
You are shown a digital read-out of the instantaneous RPM, the averaged vibra-
tion magnitude, and averaged phase during data acquisition.

Acquire Data/ Data Acquisition.

The Data Stability bar graph box judges the relative stability of these averages,
and helps you to decide when to accept the data. The diagram at the left plots
the instantaneous vector as a line with a box at the end.
Press Enter or Accept Data to accept the data once the readings are stable.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-19


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Clear Data to clear averages and start over. After you accept the data, the
program returns to the Select Measurement Point screen, and displays data
acquired for the first measurement point and highlights the next data point in the
list.

Acquire Data/ Select Measurement Point.

4-20 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or Start Data Acq. to continue.

Acquire Data / Data Acquisition.

Data are being acquired for the next measurement point. Press Enter or Accept
Data when the data are stable.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-21


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Whenever the magnitude is equal to or less than the defined bal-
ance spec, the magnitude reading displays in reverse video. When-
ever the magnitude is not within spec, the magnitude reading does
not display in reverse video.

Acquire Data/ Select Measurement Point.

4-22 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Data have been acquired for two points. Press Enter or the Start Data Acq. to
continue.

Acquire Data/ Data Acquisition.

Data being acquired for the third measurement point. Press Enter or Accept Data
when the data are stable.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-23


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquire Data/ Select Measurement Point.

Data have been acquired for three measurement points. Press Enter or Start Data
Acq. to continue.

4-24 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquire Data/Data Acquisition.

Data being acquired for the final measurement point. Press Enter or Accept Data
when the readings are stable.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-25


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

To repeat a measurement:
1 ··· Highlight the measurement with the Up/Down Arrow.
2 ··· Press Enter or the Start Data Acq. to repeat the measurement.
3 ··· Press Enter or Next Step and advance to the Select Measurement screen.

4-26 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The [X] after Reference Run tells us it is complete. The next step, Trial Run #1,
is highlighted.

Trial Run #1 is the e next step.

Acquire the Balance Data – Trial Run #1 Data


Acquire the trial run data for the first weight plane after you complete the Ref-
erence Run. This data is required to calculate a balance solution. Press Enter or
Acquire Trial Run #1 Data to begin.
Each trial run requires a trial weight on a new weight plane. Specify the trial
weight locations on the first screen of the trial run.
Place the weight so you get a significant change in data (from that of the Refer-
ence Run) without increasing the vibration levels.

Note
Remember, Weight Plane #1 is a continuous weight plane. This
means weights can be placed anywhere, or that the available posi-
tions are too irregular to define (weight splits can be done manu-
ally using the calculator mode).

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-27


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Remember, Weight Plane #2 is a discrete weight plane. Any weight
locations for this plane are specified as a weight position number,
not an angle.

Acquire Data/ Trial Weight Setup.

4-28 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Balance provides a trial weight estimation function that helps you to select a
trial weight. This calculation is optional. For this example, we use the trial
weight estimation function. First press ALT to access Calculator Mode. From
Calculator Mode, enter the Estimate Trial Weights function.

Calculator Mode.

Press Estimate Trial Weights to select this function.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-29


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Estimate Trial Weights calculates a trial weight, which reduces the vibration
levels from those of the Reference Run. Reference Run and physical data that
describe the rotor are used to make this calculation. The accuracy of this calcu-
lation depends upon the factors entered into the input screen.

Estimate Trial Weight.

This calculation is for Trial Run #1 and you want to place a weight in Weight
Plane #1. The measurement plane most affected by weights in this plane (usu-
ally the measurement plane nearest the weight plane in question) is selected as
a basis for the calculation.

4-30 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

In this case, this is Measurement Plane #1. Use any measurement point (MPT)
from this plane or an average of data from all points in this plane. If all magni-
tudes are similar, use the average. The MPT with the highest magnitudes often
gives the best results. The average has been used for this machine.

Estimate Trial Weight.

Enter the rotor weight and the radius for the trial weights. The difference
between when the heavy spot passes the sensor and when the vibratory high spot
occurs is called System Lag. Refer to the System Lag section for more informa-
tion.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-31


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The actual lag is unknown at this time, but since the machine is running below
first critical, use 45o. There is no sensor lag. The estimate for amplification
factor is 3. Press Enter or Calculate Solution to perform the calculation.

Estimate Trial Weight.

The weight for the calculated solution is only an estimate at this point, so use a
readily available weight that is reasonably close in size.
Press Insert to Trial Weight after you get the solution, to return to Trial Run #1
and insert the estimate trial weight solution on this screen. For this example, a
trial weight of 0.17 oz was placed at 42o. The weight units were specified under
Job Setup.
It is important that the same unit of measure be used throughout the process. The
diagram shows the position of this trial weight relative to the tach reference (T).

Note
If Weight Plane #1 was defined with fixed weight positions (dis-
crete positions), the calculation would have split the solution. In
this case, it is most practical to install only one weight. The posi-
tion is only approximate, so use the position with the most weight.

4-32 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter to advance to the Select Measurement Point screen. Shut the
machine down and place the trial weight(s) on the rotor.

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when
working around rotating machinery.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

Press Enter or Start Data Acq. to acquire data for Trial Run #1. As with the Ref-
erence Run, the first point in the list highlights automatically.

Caution!
If the CSI Model 648 mux is not used, verify that the proper cables
are connected before beginning data acquisition for each measure-
ment point.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-33


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The data acquisition process for the Trial Runs is the same as the information
displayed for the Reference Run. The picture below shows the final readings for
Trial Run #1.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

Once all Trial Run #1 data has been acquired, you are ready to acquire data for
Trial Run #2.
For the second trial run, you can leave previous trial weight(s) in place and add
new trial weights in the second weight plane, or remove previous trial weight(s)
and add new trial weights in the second weight plane.
In this example, the original trial weights are removed.

4-34 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Typically, the solution is calculated with the trial weights left in
place if they had improved the balance during the trial run.

Acquire Data/Remove or Include Trial Weight Reminder.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-35


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Highlight the option you want with Up/Down. Press Enter to accept this screen
and advance to Select Measurement.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

The [X] after Trial Run #1 tells us it is complete. The next step, Trial Run #2, is
highlighted.

Acquire the Balance Data – Trial Run #2 Data


Now that Trial Run #1 is finished you can acquire the trial run data for the
second weight plane. This data is required to calculate a balance solution.
Press Enter or Acquire Trial Run #2 Data to begin. Enter the weight and location
of any trial weights, which are present during Trial Run #2.
The steps and screens for Trial Run #2 are similar to those in Trial Run #1.
In this example, the weight used for Trial Run #1 was removed. Weight Plane
#2 had 0.12 oz installed at position 1.

4-36 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Remember, Weight Plane #1 was defined as a continuous weight
plane. This means weights can be placed anywhere, or that the
available positions are too irregular to be defined (weight splits
would be done manually using the calculator mode).

Note
Remember, Weight Plane #2 was defined as a discrete weight
plane. Any weight locations for this plane are specified as a weight
position number, not an angle.

Acquire Data/Trial Weight Setup.

Place the trial weight(s) on the rotor and press Enter to advance to the Select
Measurement Point screen.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-37


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when
working around rotating machinery.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

Start the machine and acquire data for Trial Run #2. As with the Reference Run,
the first point in the list is automatically highlighted. Press Enter or Start Data
Acq. to begin.

Caution!
If you do not use CSI Model 648, verify that the proper cables are
connected before beginning data acquisition for each measure-
ment point.

4-38 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The data acquisition screen process has already been shown (for the Reference
Run). The picture below shows the final readings.

Acquire Data/Select Measurement Point.

This is a two-plane balancing job, so you only need two trial runs. After you
acquire all data for Trial Run #2, you are ready to calculate the balance correc-
tion.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-39


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

For the balance correction, the previous trial weight(s) can be left in place or
removed.

Acquire Data/Remove or Include Trial Weight reminder.

Highlight the option you want with the Up/Down Arrow.


Press Enter to advance to the Main Menu. For this example, the trial weight is
removed.

4-40 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 41 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
The solution is usually calculated with the trial weights in place if
the trial weights improved the balance during the trial run.

Acquire Data/Main Menu.

The [X] after Acquire Data tells us it is complete. The next step, View Balance
Correction, is highlighted.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-41


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 42 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Calculate the Balance Correction


View the balance correction after you complete Acquire Data. Press Enter or
View Corr. to see the correction. The Balance Correction screen displays.

View Balance Correction.

The calculated correction calls for the addition of 0.14 oz at 5o in Weight Plane
#1 and 0.06 oz at position 1 in Weight Plane #2.

4-42 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 43 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

To remove weight, press Remove Weight. We add weight in this example. When
ready, press Enter to advance to the Main Menu.

Acquire Data/Main Menu.

The [X] after View Balance Correction tells us it is complete. The next step,
Trim Run 1, is highlighted.

Make the Required Trim Correction


After completing View Balance Correction, you are ready to make the required
trim corrections. This brings the vibration due to imbalance within the specified
tolerance. In the upper right section of the Main Menu, notice that the number
of trim data acquired (also called the number of Trim Runs completed) for the
job is zero (0).

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-43


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 44 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or Trim Run to acquire data. The Trim Run status screen for the first
trim run (Trim Run 1) displays.

Trim Run 1.

The Trim Run section consists of two steps (Applied Weight and Acquire Trim
Data). None of the trim status brackets [ ] are checked complete.

Make the Required Trim Correction – Applied Weight


First, enter the actual weight applied to store this information with the balance
job.

4-44 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 45 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or Applied Weight to define the trim weights. The Applied Weight
screen displays.

Trial Run Applied Weight.

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when
working around rotating machinery.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-45


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 46 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The entry fields default to the last calculated balance correction. For this
example, slightly different weights and locations were used. Make the necessary
changes.

Trial Run Applied Weight.

Weights of 0.12 oz at Weight Plane #1 and 0.08 oz at position 1 in Weight Plane


#2. Balance provides a function to see a calculation of the residual vibration that
results from these applied weights. This calculation is optional.

4-46 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 47 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Estimate Results to see a calculation of the residual vibration.

Estimate Results.

Note
If your answer is significantly different from these predictions, this
could indicate: inaccurate data or weight placement, changing
system response due to large reductions in magnitude, or other
causes of system non-linearity. In this case, additional trim correc-
tions based on the same data may also be inaccurate. You may need
to repeat Reference and Trim Runs to establish new influence coef-
ficients.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-47


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 48 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Exit Estimate Results to return to the Applied Weight screen. When
Applied Weight has been setup the way you want it, press Enter to advance to
the Trim Run #1 Status screen.

Trim Run 1, Applied Weight is complete, and Acquire Trim Data is the next step.

4-48 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 49 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Make the Required Trim Correction – Acquire Trim Data


After defining the applied weights, check the results. Press Enter or Acquire
Trim Data to define trim weights. The Select Measurement Point screen dis-
plays.

Trim Run Select Measurement Point.

Note
As the vibration magnitude drops, the phase is less stable.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-49


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 50 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The data acquisition process has already been shown for the Reference Run The
final readings are displayed in the picture below:

The final trim run readings for this measurement point.

4-50 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 51 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

After acquiring all data for Trim Run 1, review the data before continuing. Press
Enter or Next Step to advance to the Tolerance Check screen.

Trim Run Tolerance Check.

The Tolerance Check diagram shows the phase and magnitude changes from
one measurement plane at a time. The symbols for each MPT ID show where
the initial data vectors’ end points were located.
Up to two additional points are plotted by the lines leading from the symbols.
These show the data from the last two Check Results runs.
A target circle in the center shows the magnitude boundary equal to the vibration
specification defined under Job Setup. Use Expand Scale and Decrease Scale to
change the plot scaling. With the scaling changed, it is easy to see the target
circle.
The text shows the current magnitude at each sensor, the percentage reduction
achieved when the current magnitude is compared to the initial magnitude (%
Down), and the present MPT’s percentage of specification (% Spec).
For this example, the inboard horizontal reading (IBH) is presently .17 mils PK-
PK, resulting in a vibration magnitude reading which is 3% of the reference
reading (and is currently 17% of the specification).
Press Enter or the Select Meas. Plane to see the next measurement plane.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-51


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 52 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
Whenever the magnitude is equal to or less than the defined bal-
ance spec, the magnitude reading displays in reverse video. When-
ever the magnitude is not within spec, the magnitude reading does
not display in reverse video.

Trim Run Tolerance Check.

4-52 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 53 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

When finished, press Enter to advance to the Trim Run #1 Status screen.

Trim Run Tolerance Check.

The [X] after Acquire Trim Data tells us it is complete. The next step, “Proceed
to the next step,” is highlighted.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-53


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 54 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Press Enter or Next Step to advance to the Main Menu.

Main Menu.

View Trim 1 Correction is highlighted and Trim Run 1 is grayed out and marked
complete with an [X].
In the upper right side of the screen, the number of trim data acquired for the job
is one (1). The job and job data are stored automatically in the analyzer, so the
job can be considered complete. For this example, we continue the balance job.

4-54 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 55 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Calculate Trim Correction


Press Enter to accept “View Balance Correction” or press View Corr. to see the
next recommended correction. The View Trim Run #1 Correction screen dis-
plays.

Trim Run 1 Correction.

The calculated correction calls for the addition of 0.01 oz at 47o in Weight Plane
#1 and 0 oz at positions 6 and 7 in Weight Plane #2.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-55


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 56 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

To remove weight, press Remove Weight. When ready, press Enter to advance
to the Main Menu.

Main Menu.

Notice that the next logical step, Trim Run 2, is active and highlighted.

4-56 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 57 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Make the Next Required Trim Correction


After completing View Trim 1 Correction, you are ready to make the next
required trim corrections that should bring the vibration due to imbalance within
the specified tolerance. To begin, press Enter to accept “Trim Run 2” or press
Trim Run to acquire data. The Trim Run status screen for the second trim run
(Trim Run #2) displays.

Trim Run 2.

The steps for the second trim correction or any additional trim runs are the same
as described above for Trim Run 1, except the weights applied to the rotor for
the second or additional trim runs are added to the rotor without removing the
previous trim correction weights.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-57


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 58 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Complete Trim Run 2 to continue. Press Enter to accept the highlighted selec-
tion “Proceed to Next Step” or press Next Step to advance to the Main Menu.

Acquire Data/ Main Menu.

View Trim 2 Correction is highlighted and Trim Run 2 is grayed out and marked
complete with an [X].
In the upper right side of the screen, the number of trim data acquired for the job
is two. The job and job data are stored automatically in the analyzer, so the job
can be considered complete.
For this example, assume the second balance trim correction reduced the bal-
ance satisfactorily. Therefore, additional trim corrections are not necessary. If
they were used, these weights would be added without removing the previous
correction weights.

Assigning Notes to the Job


You can assign notes as you progress through a job. Press Notes from the ALT
menu to access the notepad. This brings you to the Select Category screen.
There are four groups of notes to choose from.

4-58 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 59 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

If you want to note the reason for the balance job, start by selecting the group
with Next/Prev Group. There are several pre-defined notes to choose from. If a
suitable entry is not listed, press User Notes to write your own note.

Notes.

For this example, the balance job was initiated because of an overhaul. Use the
following steps to enter a note:
1·····Select the appropriate group (“Reason For Balance” in this case).
2·····Highlight the note you want with the Note Up/Down Arrow.
3·····Press Add to Job to attach it to your job.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-59


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 60 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Note
To remove a note attached to a job: highlight the note with the
Stored Up/Down Arrow. Press Delete Note to remove it. The
bottom half of the screen displays all notes attached to the active
job.

Notes.

4-60 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 61 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select the Initial Condition group with Next/Prev Group. If the rotor was
cleaned before balancing, use the Note Up/Down Arrow to highlight the appro-
priate note. Then press Add to Job.

Notes.

Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-61


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 62 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Select the Procedure Related group. If balance was not performed at normal
load, highlight the appropriate note with the Note Up/Down Arrow and press
Add to Job.

Notes.

When you have finished attaching notes, press Enter, Back or Reset to return to
the Main Menu.
The number of notes in the upper right side of the screen indicates that this job
has three attached notes.

4-62 Fast Bal Job Example – Advanced Balance Mode


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Chapter 5

Field Balancing Application Notes

Overview
Balancing is the process of altering the distribution of mass in a rotor so that the
center of mass is at the center of rotation. Every machine has some degree of
unbalance. Every balance job is a compromise between perfection and reality,
governed by economics and technical practicality.
Balancing rotating assemblies in the field has several significant advantages:
• The rotor is balanced in its own bearings.
• The rotor is balanced at normal rotational frequency.
• The rotor is balanced at normal load.
• The rotor is driven as it is driven during normal operation.
• Tear down, re-assembly, and realignment are not necessary.
• Downtime is greatly reduced.
Field balancing is not only a valuable procedure for equipment with extended
service in the field, but also for new installations or rebuilds, even when the
rotor has been “shop” balanced.
Operating frequency, rotor stiffness, the bearing support and its stiffness, load,
and drive conditions all contribute to the final running condition of the
assembly. Specifications met in the shop may not be satisfied on-site under final
conditions. Once put into service, the rotor balance may change due to stress
relieving, erosion, buildup, etc.

5-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Extending Machine Life


Balancing only machines that are so severely out-of-balance that they are a nui-
sance or in danger of catastrophic failure is not a good policy. Imbalance is a
major contributor to decreased bearing life. Use this formula to calculate the
theoretical life of ball bearings:

Where:
H = Ball bearing life in hours
C = Capacity of bearing in lbs. (from manufacturing specifications)
L = In-service bearing load (in lbs.)
M = Weight of mass opposing vibration (in lbs.)
V = Velocity of vibration (in inches per second)
F = Frequency of vibration in CPM or RPM

Example Case:
Dead load = 1,000 lbs. RPM = 1,800 lbs.
Bearing capacity = 20,000 lbs. Mass = 13,000 lbs.

5-2 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Bearing
Vibration
Life
In/Sec
Years
0.6 1.14
0.5 1.47
0.4 1.94
0.3 2.63
0.2 3.70
0.1 5.44
0.0 8.46

Note
Notice how the theoretical bearing life increases significantly as
the imbalance decreases. If your residual imbalance were cut in
half, what would that be worth to you?

Overview 5-3
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Be Consistent
A good, easily repeatable balancing procedure increases the reliability of your
data and lets you balance the machine more precisely. The Fast Bal system is
designed to help you accomplish this goal. When performing a balance job, CSI
recommends that you complete the following steps.
1.····Visually inspect the machine. Use the Fast Bal Notes feature to attach
observations to the machine data. Check for leaks, cracks, hot bearings,
unusual noises or vibration patterns, base/mounting condition, foreign
matter on the rotor, etc.
2.····Clean the rotor. This is especially important if the rotor is prone to
accumulate foreign material. Removing the accumulation will often
correct much or all of the unbalance.
3.····Mount the transducers securely and do not move, or remove them during
the procedure. Holding the sensor with your hands introduces
unnecessary variability into the data. Magnetic mounting on a rough
surface allows sensor motion and poor coupling; stud mounting can be
expensive and difficult. Fast Bal’s accessory kit includes quick-set
adhesive and metal mounting pads with machined surfaces to ensure
reliable attachment of the sensor’s magnetic base. If the sensors must be
removed before balancing is complete, the metal pads provide precise
locations for replacement of the sensors. These pads may be removed at
the end of the balance job or, left for later trim balancing.
4.····Avoid confusion and possible error caused by switching cables or
moving sensors between measurement points. The Fast Bal Standard
Accessory Kit includes a Model 648 4-channel multiplexer and four
sensors to eliminate the need to switch or move sensors (on most
balancing jobs).
5.····Standardize the setup as much as possible. This simplifies the process
for new users and makes later trim balances easier. Fast Bal accessories
help you to standardize by using default settings and color-coded input
channels, cabling, and sensors. Using the same sensor at the same
location for both the original balance job and for later trim balances will
improve accuracy and ensure better results with fewer runs.
6.····Use repeatable operating conditions (loads, temperatures, and speeds).
Varying operating conditions during the balance process can introduce

5-4 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

data variability and decrease the accuracy of the balance calculations.


7. ··· Store every balance job in UltraMgr for later reference. This saves setup
time when a machine must be balanced again and provides necessary
setup and dynamic data for one-run trim balancing. Default, standard
setups can be stored in UltraMgr and loaded into the Fast Bal program
as needed, further encouraging the standardization of procedures.

Trim Balancing
After the machine has been balanced the first time, trim balancing (sometimes
called one-run balancing) will reduce the number of stops/starts required to
bring the machine back into specification. This saves labor as well as reducing
machine stress. If you store the balance data from each job into the UltraMgr
database, you can load both data and notes back into the Fast Bal program for
trim balancing the same machine.
Similar techniques can be used for identical machines coming off a production
line. Balance the first unit and use that data to “trim balance” additional units.

Overview 5-5
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Field Balancing - Before You Begin...


Since an industry-wide fallacy exists that imbalance is the most common cause
of machinery vibration, there is a tendency to do inadequate, or no, vibration
analysis before attempting to balance a rotor. If the field balancing procedure
does not work, it is because the vibration analysis was not carefully done or the
rotor dynamics were not understood.
Unless using the balancing procedure itself as a diagnostic tool, never attempt
field balancing until you have determined that the forcing function is rotor
imbalance. In addition, investigate the rotor resonance, bearing support reso-
nance, and other system resonances to understand where the rotational fre-
quency is in relation to these natural frequencies.
As the operating speed approaches a resonance, factors such as amplification
and phase shifts can make the balance job difficult, if not impossible, to perform
successfully. As a general rule of thumb, the operating frequency should be 15-
20 percent above or below these resonances.

5-6 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 7 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

A Few Basics to Keep in Mind


The following facts are principles which form the basis for the balancing of
machinery:
• The vibration caused by imbalance occurs at the rotational frequency
(1xRPM) of the unbalanced rotor.
• The vibration is directly proportional to the amount of unbalance.
Doubling the amount of the unbalance doubles the amount or magnitude
of the vibration.
• A shift in the heavy spot results in an equal shift in the phase angle.
• All weights in a single plane sum vectorially to equal a single heavy spot.
• The amount of unbalance is measured in weight and distance from the
center of the rotor (radius); for example, oz.-in., gm-in., or gm-cm.
Increasing the weight or the radius increases the amount of the unbalance
in direct proportion.
• Rotors operating below their first critical are called rigid rotors. These
can be balanced in any two planes. Rotors operating above their first
critical are called flexible rotors and may require balance weights in more
than two planes.

Analyze the Problem


Attempting to correct a vibration problem by balancing without first analyzing
the machine is like a doctor prescribing treatments for patients without ever
checking their symptoms. While the treatment may not harm the patient, it is
unlikely to cure the illness.
Vibration due to imbalance always occurs at the operating frequency (com-
monly referred to as 1xRPM). If the vibration is at any other frequency or at har-
monics of operating frequency (2xRPM, 3xRPM, etc.) there is some other
cause. You cannot correct misalignment, bad bearings, structural looseness, etc.,
by balancing the machine.

Field Balancing - Before You Begin... 5-7


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 8 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

You may have multiple problems. For example, there may be a high 1xRPM due
to imbalance and prominent harmonics of 1xRPM due to structural looseness.
The degradation of the structure may also have caused the resonant frequency
to move closer to the operating frequency. Balancing this machine without
addressing the structural and resonance concerns can make the balancing job
more difficult due to decreased linearity of the system response. Additional trim
runs may be required and, once balanced, this machine may be difficult to keep
balanced. As a general rule of thumb, address the worst problems first.
While imbalance always causes vibration at 1xRPM, 1xRPM vi-
bration is not always caused by an imbalance!

A partial list of forcing frequencies for vibration at 1xRPM includes:


• Imbalance
• Misalignment
• Bent or bowed shaft
• Cracked shaft
• Eccentricity
• Case strain
• Open rotor bars in motors
• Partial rubs, and
• Obstructions in one vane of a pump or fan.
Problems which allow an unusually high system response as a result of 1xRPM
faults include:
• Resonance / critical speed, and
• Looseness or low support stiffness.
Several measurements can help you verify the presence of an imbalance.

5-8 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 9 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Spectrum Analysis:
• There should be a significant vibration magnitude present at the 1xRPM
peak with very little at harmonics.
• There should be no other unexplained peaks with significant magnitudes.
• If available, use zoom or synchronous averaging to verify the exact
frequency of the vibration.
• 1xRPM magnitudes in the horizontal and vertical directions should not
be vastly different (3:1), unless there is a highly asymmetrical stiffness in
the structure.
• Axial 1xRPM vibration levels should be less than radial levels (this may
not hold true for some overhung motors).

Waveform Analysis:
• The pattern in the time waveform should be very sinusoidal and
symmetrical at 1xRPM.
• There should be no truncation or sharp discontinuity.
• Beats indicate the presence of closely spaced frequencies.

Phase Data:
• Horizontal versus vertical phase readings on the same bearing housing
should be about 90 degrees apart (±30 degrees).
• The relationship between horizontal readings from end to end should be
about the same as the relationship between the vertical probes (±30
degrees).
Additional tests should be performed to check for structural or rotor resonances.
• Plot coastdown data (1xRPM magnitude and phase) as a function of RPM
to locate the magnitude peaks and 180° phase shifts associated with
resonances. This procedure can help determine where the operating
frequency is located relative to any resonances which might affect the
balance procedure.
• An impact test can be used to perform a triggered data capture to acquire
a spectrum of the excited structure “ringing down”. This test can identify
resonances above running speed as well as others at or below running
speed.

Field Balancing - Before You Begin... 5-9


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 10 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Prepare for the Balance Job


Once you have determined through careful analysis that imbalance is the forcing
function and that field balancing is needed, your initial preparations should
include the following:
• If the rotor has significant environmental or process material adhering to
the surfaces, have it thoroughly cleaned. The rotor may return to
acceptable balance conditions when cleaned.
• Mount vibration transducers at each bearing. The transducers should be
rigidly mounted to the bearing, never hand-held, and should not be
moved during the entire process.
• Make provisions to read phase within 5 degrees. Take phase readings
from one shaft reference throughout the balance operation, even if there
is more than one correction plane. A rigidly mounted reference
transducer, such as a phototach or magnetic proximity pickup is preferred
rather than a strobe, whenever possible.
• The operating frequency should be repeatable run to run.
• Ensure that the vibration and phase data are repeatable. If data from a
balance run cannot be repeated, it may be due to loose parts, chips, water
soluble lubricant, rust, water, or other types of foreign matter in the rotor.
• Ensure that correction weights are available and that you have a means of
determining the weight.
Your goal is to ensure that all variations in phase and magnitude are due to
changes from the movement or application of weights, not due to poor tech-
nique. Good techniques minimize the required runs and improve the final preci-
sion of the balance job.

5-10 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 11 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

General Outline for a “First Time” Balancing Procedure


A “first time” balancing procedure is a field balancing job on a machine where
no previous balancing data exists. If the machine had been balanced previously,
the data from the previous balance could have been loaded into the balancing
instrument so that a one-run balance might be possible. One-run balances are
discussed in “Trim Correction or One-Run Balance” on page 5-22. Assuming
the proper analysis and preliminary steps have been taken, the basic steps for
any balance job are:
1. ··· Define the balance job –
• Describe the job (job number, machine ID, etc.)
• Identify weight planes
• Identify measurement planes
• Identify measurement points
• Provide number of approximate balance speeds
• Provide vibration sensor information
2. ··· Acquire data from the “as-is” condition as the reference run for each
measurement point and speed.
3. ··· Acquire trial run data –
• Add a trial weight to the rotor in one weight plane

General Outline for a “First Time” Balancing Procedure 5-11


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 12 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when
working around rotating machinery.

• Acquire data for all measurement points and speeds


• Repeat for each weight plane
4.···· Calculate and install necessary correction weights.
5.···· Record the applied weights.
6.···· Check result – acquire data for the corrected condition and review
against tolerance.
7.···· Calculate the next trim correction, if additional correction is needed.
Otherwise, you are finished.
8.···· Apply additional trim weights without removing the correction weight.
9.···· Check your results. Repeat trim runs as needed.

5-12 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 13 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Step 1 - Define the Balance Job

Identify the Correction Planes


A rotor system can be balanced exactly in N+2 planes (where N = the number
of shaft criticals below operating speed). Most mechanical systems are designed
to operate below their first shaft critical, therefore, use 0 + 2 = 2 planes. Virtually
all systems operate below their fourth critical; 3 + 2 = 5 planes. Frequently, how-
ever, only two balance planes are available on a single shaft. This will normally
allow an acceptable balance compromise, even if not exact. Additional points to
consider are:
• The vendor may supply standard positions such as balance rings.
• For a uniform rotor operating below the first critical, locate a single plane
anywhere for an adequate balance.
• If the rotor operates above the first critical and two-plane balancing is
being used, locate the correction planes 25% of the distance between
bearings.
• For non-uniform rotors, apply the correction weights first to the planes
with the greatest mass moments of inertia.
• Do not add correction weights at any location that affects the rotor
stiffness or modifies the aerodynamics or flow of the system.

Define the Measurement Points


You must have at least one measurement point for each weight plane. However,
even when there is only one weight correction plane, experience has shown the
most satisfactory results can be achieved by placing a horizontal and vertical
transducer at each bearing supporting the rotor. This is especially true for over-
hung rotors. Often, corrections which minimize the vibration for one bearing
can have adverse or minimal effect on the other. If possible, when using only
one transducer per bearing, place all transducers at the same orientation (hori-
zontal or vertical). While not essential, doing so will make it easier to compare
the data from all planes.
Another advantage results from using two sensors oriented 90° apart (such as
horizontal and vertical) at each bearing housing. The additional information will
make it easier to detect non-linearity between the two axes, which could be
caused by one axis being nearer to a resonance.

General Outline for a “First Time” Balancing Procedure 5-13


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 14 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Define the Speeds


Most equipment which is run at only one speed, and below the first resonance,
will only need to be balanced at that speed. However, machines which are vari-
able speed, or have flexible rotors which pass through critical frequencies on the
way to the running speed, may need to be balanced at multiple speeds. If the
machine is vibrating too much to run at full speed, it may have to be first bal-
anced at a lower speed.

Define the Vibration Sensor


This ensures the desired units of measure will be displayed by the instrument
and on reports. Also, when auxiliary calculations are made for trial weight
placement, it is important to know the correct magnitude units.

Note
If you discover part way through a balance job that the wrong sen-
sor units are being used, you can probably complete the job using
those same units. The influence coefficients that are calculated for
placement of correction weights will still be accurate, as long as
you do not change from the units originally specified. If you want
to change to the correct units, all readings will have to be repeated.
Calculations depend on consistent units throughout the balancing
procedure. Any data printed on reports from the instrument will
also have incorrect units. Once the job is complete, you need to
take a final set of readings in the desired units or, manually make
the correct conversion to know how the magnitudes compare to
your specifications. In Advanced Mode, you can use the Units
Conversion calculator (from the ALT screen), to have the program
calculate the units in acceleration, velocity, and displacement.

5-14 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 15 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Step 2 - Acquire As-is Data


Before any trial weights are placed, the as-is, or reference, data must be
acquired. Be sure the machine is run under the same conditions (load, speed,
temperature) for all remaining runs. Let the unit attain normal operating temper-
ature before taking any data. If the machine must be brought to operating tem-
perature, then monitor the vibration level as it warms. Should the vibration
increase with temperature, a thermal problem could be causing bowing of the
rotor.
When the machine is shut down after acquiring the reference run data, watch the
vibration and phase. Record these data if possible. You can use it to judge the
presence of a resonance near or below running speed.

Step 3 - Acquire Trial Run Data


One trial run is required for each weight correction plane which was defined.
Each trial run involves stopping the machine, installing a trial weight in a weight
plane, inputting the weight and location of the trial weight into the balance pro-
gram, starting the machine, and acquiring data at all measurement points and
speeds.

Trial Weights
The purpose of the trial weight is to determine the effect on the imbalance vec-
tors when a known weight is added at a known location. This information is used
to calculate the influence coefficients needed for predicting the balance solu-
tion.
Add a trial weight to only one weight plane at a time. The trial weights from pre-
vious trial runs can be removed or left in place. However, if previous trial
weights are left on, be sure to provide the weight and location of every trial
weight still installed for the current trial run.
The goal in placing the trial weight is to cause a change of at least 30% in mag-
nitude and/or phase readings as compared to the reference run.

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when work-
ing around rotating machinery.

General Outline for a “First Time” Balancing Procedure 5-15


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 16 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Location and Size of Trial Weight


In principle, the trial weight can be any size and at any location in the weight
plane as long as the resulting vibration doesn’t damage the machine. However,
there may be occasions when the machine is vibrating so badly, you need to
decrease the vibration with the trial weight, if possible. Reducing the vibration
with the trial run is always impressive (to any interested observers).
Calculate the heavy spot with this formula:
Heavy Spot = Angle of Vib Transducer + Phase + Units Type Adj. - System Lag

Place the trial weight 180° from the heavy spot. Enter the requested information
in the Estimate Trial Weight Function. The next formula allows you to calculate
the amount of unbalance in ounce-inches (UB):
UB = Vibratory Weight in Ounces X Vib magnitude in mils

The size of the trial weight (TW) in ounces is:


TW = (UB ÷ Amplification Factor) ÷ Radius in inches of Weight Location

A detailed explanation can be found in “Special Topics” on page 5-25.

Step 4 - Calculate and Install the Correction Weight


After placing trial weights and recording the data, you will be ready to calculate
the balance solution. If the weight cannot be placed at the calculated location for
any reason, determine the position of the nearest locations to each side where
the weight can be placed. Then, go to the calculator mode and use the “Split
Weights” function. This function calculates how much weight must be placed at
the two locations to equal the effect of the original solution. All positions must
be at the same radius or you will have to adjust the weight to equivalent ounce-
inches, gram-inches, etc.
Trial weights are usually removed before correction weights are added. This is
done to reduce the number of unnecessary or conflicting weights present on the
rotor. However, if the trial weights must be left in place, Fast Bal will calculate
a solution for trial weights removed or trial weights left on.

Warning!
Follow proper safety and machine lock out procedures when work-
ing around rotating machinery.

5-16 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 17 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Step 5 – Record Applied Weights


Select Trim Run from the main menu; select Applied Weight. Enter the actual
weights used if different from the calculated weights. Indicate whether trial
weights were removed or left on.

Step 6 - Check Result (Acquire Trim Data)


Using Acquire Trim Data, take a new set of readings with the correction weights
installed. A comparison to tolerances and the initial data will be displayed. Con-
tinue to the Main Menu. If acceptable, no additional correction is required.

Step 7 Calculate the Next Trim Correction


If additional correction is needed, go to “View Trim 1 Correction” to review the
next recommended balance correction.

Step 8 - Apply Additional Trim Weights


Go to “Trim Run” in the Fast Bal Program. Apply the new weights without
removing the first balance correction.

Step 9 - Check Your Results


After installing the trim correction, repeat steps 5 and 6. Continue repeating
steps 7, 8, 5 and 6 until you are satisfied with the results. If you cannot achieve
the specification which has been set, consider the factors discussed under
“Potential Problems During Balancing” in “Special Topics” on page 5-25.

General Outline for a “First Time” Balancing Procedure 5-17


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 18 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Typical Single Plane Balance Job Checklist

Define the balance job.


• 1 weight plane
• 2 measurement planes
• 4 measurement points
• 1 speed

Acquire data from the “as-is” condition as the reference run.

Add a trial weight to the rotor.

Acquire data from the new condition as the Trial Run.

Calculate the needed correction weights.

Remove the trial weight and add the correction weight.

Acquire data for the corrected condition.

Calculate the trim correction.

Apply trim weight without removing the correction weight.

Repeat trim runs as needed.

5-18 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 19 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Multiple Plane Balance Job


Many rotor configurations require correction weights in more than one plane. In
these cases, single plane balancing can leave unacceptable levels of vibration.
A balance weight added to one end affects the vibration levels at both ends. The
primary effect is the balance weight effect on the nearest support bearing. Cross
effect is the effect of the balance weight on the opposite support bearing. Mul-
tiple plane balancing takes into account both primary and cross effect when cal-
culating corrections.
Multi-plane balancing is a compromise and the degree of compromise is depen-
dant on the flexibility of the rotor. For a uniform rotor running well below the
first critical frequency, the correction plane location is mostly a matter of con-
venience (but try to have one correction plane per bearing). If a uniform rotor is
running above N criticals (N = number of criticals below running speed) try to
use N+2 correction planes. If this is not possible, locate the correction planes
25% of the distance between bearings, measured from the bearings.
Label the correction planes in the declining order of the mass moment of inertia
at each plane, rather than sequentially. Usually the plane with the highest mass
moment of inertia is the most likely area of difficulty. Adding trial weights to
the planes with the highest inertias will sometimes solve the imbalance before
all planes are balanced.
The mass moment of inertia at the correction plane is proportional to the weight
of the rotor concentrated at that plane times the square of the average radius of
this mass. Even though the mass may be the same at two bearings, the mass at
the greatest radius is the higher mass moment of inertia.
You must define at least one measurement plane for each correction weight
plane. Also, you must define a minimum of one measurement point for each
measurement plane. If two measurement points (90° apart) are defined for each
measurement plane, you can see if both axes are reacting similarly. Occasion-
ally, a machine will not react symmetrically, usually due to significant differ-
ence in constraint between axes or the presence of a resonance.

Multiple Plane Balance Job 5-19


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 20 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

A balance correction in one plane does not correct all planes. In fact, balancing
only one plane can worsen the imbalance in other planes. A set of numbers,
called influence coefficients, are used to determine how changes in one plane
affect the other planes in the system. In order to calculate the influence coeffi-
cients for each plane, you must add trial weights to each of those planes. One
run is required for each of these trial weight additions. You can remove the trial
weight from each plane before adding weight to the next plane, or leave it in the
previous plane. These weights do not have to be the same weight or at the same
position for each plane.

5-20 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 21 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Typical 2-Plane Balance Job Checklist

Define the following balance job items:


• 2 weight planes
• 2 measurement planes
• 4 measurement points
• 1 speed
Acquire data for all measurement points at both planes from the “as-is” condi-
tion as the reference run.

Add a trial weight at one correction plane.

Enter trial weight data for trial run 1 / plane 1.

Acquire data for all measurement points at both planes for Trial Run 1.

Add a trial weight to the 2nd correction plane. The previous weight at plane 1
can be left or removed at this time.

Enter trial weight data for Trial Run 2 / Plane 2. If the trial weight from Trial
Run 1 was not removed, be sure to also enter that weight in the data for Trial
Run 2.

Acquire data at all measurement points for both planes for Trial Run 2.

Calculate the correction weights needed for both planes.

Remove the trial weight and add the correction weights.

Acquire data for the corrected condition.

Calculate the trim correction.

Apply trim weight without removing the correction weight.

Repeat trim runs as needed.

Multiple Plane Balance Job 5-21


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 22 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trim Correction or One-Run Balance

Using Data from Previous Job


Once a machine has been successfully balanced, store and transfer this balance
job to a computer database. If this same machine needs to be balanced again (at
a later date), the previous balance job can be downloaded back to the balance
analyzer to eliminate the need for new trial runs.
Once the old balance job is stored in the balance analyzer, recall the old job and
perform a new trim balance. Assign a new job number to this balance and store
it back to the computer for later reference.
Exercise care when using stored balance data. Ensure that photo-
cells and transducers are placed at the same positions they were in
when the influence coefficient data were gathered. If the machine
has undergone significant physical changes, stored influence coef-
ficients may no longer be valid; you may need to collect new data.

5-22 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 23 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

General Outline for a “Trim Balance”


1)··· Load the reference and trial run data from a previous balance job on this
machine into the Current Job area of the balance analyzer.
2)··· Go to View Trim Correction, but ignore the recommended solution.
Press Enter to return to the Main Menu.
3)··· Go to Trim Run.

4)··· Go to Applied Weight and enter zero for each weight entry. When you
have completed this, press Enter or Next Step to go to the Trim Run
Status screen.
5)··· Go to Acquire Trim Data and acquire data on all measurement points.
These will become your initial readings for this job.
6)··· When all data has been acquired, press Enter or Next Step to display the
Tolerance Check screen(s).
7)··· From the Tolerance Check screen, press Enter to go to the Trim Run
Status screen.
8)··· Press Enter or Next Step to complete the trim run and return to the Main
Menu.
9)··· Go to View Trim Correction and calculate the trim correction you need.
10)· Apply the trim weight without removing previous balance weights.

11)· Go to Trim Run.

12)· Go to Applied Weight and enter the amount of weight and the location
of the weight you placed on the rotor. When finished, press Enter to go
to the Trim Run Status screen.
13)· Go to Acquire Trim Data and acquire data on all measurement points.

14)· When all data has been acquired, press Enter to go to the Tolerance
Check Screens.
15)· After reviewing the Tolerance Check information, press Enter to go to

General Outline for a “Trim Balance” 5-23


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 24 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

the Trim Run Status Screen.


16) ·Press Enter or Next Step to complete the trim run and go to the Main
Menu.
17) ·Repeat steps 9-16 as needed.

What if the Trim Balance doesn’t work?


If applying trim weights using previous balance data results in some locations
increasing in magnitude while others decrease, or simply fails to decrease the
magnitude at all, you may need new reference and trial run data.
A Trim Balance may not work due to changes in the machine response since the
previous balance, or because of accuracy limitations due to technique or equip-
ment. In either case, you have three options:
a)····Begin a completely new balance job by acquiring new Reference and
Trial Run data.
b) ···If a trim weight was placed in only one plane, you can use the first data
acquired for the “As Is” data. Then, the Trim Data acquired after placing
the trim correction may be suitable as a trial run. Use Review/Edit data
to place this data into the Reference and Trial Run fields. Collect any
remaining trial runs needed and calculate a new balance correction.
c)····If trim weights were placed in multiple planes and the result was
unsatisfactory, use either of the Acquire Trim Data runs as the reference
data and collect new Trial Run data.

5-24 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 25 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Special Topics

Phase
Phase is the location of the peak vibration relative to a reference pulse. This
means the reference mark on the rotor has moved a measured degree of rotation
from the reference pick-up when the vibration transducer senses the maximum
vibration related to 1xRPM. The reference may be reflective tape for a photo-
tach, shaft keyway, or key for a magnetic pick-up, etc. The reference pulse is
generated by the strobe light, phototach, magnetic pick-up, etc., and indicates
when the rotor is at the “zero” position relative to rotation.
Phase can be measured with a strobe light utilizing either:
• A reference mark on the rotating element and reading angles from the
stationary element, or
• A reference mark on the stationary member and reading phase angles
from the rotating member.
You can also measure phase using a reference transducer, such as the CSI 404
Phototach or the CSI 407 magnetic reference pick-up, and displaying the result
directly on the balance analyzer. Whatever method is used, repeatability and
consistency are essential.
All CSI equipment measures the phase in degrees of rotation starting at the
leading edge of the reference mark and measuring opposite to the direction of
rotation. For example, if the rotor turns in the counter-clockwise direction, mea-
sure increasing degrees in the clockwise direction.
The location (or phase) of the maximum vibration is related to where the imbal-
ance is located, much as the magnitude of the vibration is related to the degree
of imbalance. However, the actual location of the imbalance is also affected by
the system lag.

Special Topics 5-25


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 26 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

System Lag
The mechanical system can have a “lag” between the point where the heavy spot
passes and the point where the maximum vibration (vibratory high spot) occurs.
When using the balance program where reference and trial runs provide cause
and effect data (which is translated into influence coefficients), the system lag
does not have to be determined for successful balancing. However, if you want
to calculate the location of the heavy spot for trial weight placement, you will
need to consider system, and possibly sensor lag. For most mechanical systems,
the high spot will lag the heavy spot. The amount of system lag will always be
between 0° and 180°. Below resonance the lag approaches 0° as the rotational
frequency moves further from the resonance. Above resonance the lag
approaches 180° as the rotational frequency moves further above the resonance.
At resonance, the lag is 90°.
If you have determined the resonant frequency of the machine, you can estimate
the system lag based on how far above or below resonance the rotational fre-
quency is located. If you have not determined resonant frequency, observe the
machine during the coast down from the reference run. Record coastdown data
if possible. If not, observe the magnitude and phase immediately after shut-
down. If the phase changes dramatically at shutdown, you are near a system res-
onance. If the vibration magnitude rises then falls, the rotational frequency is
above resonance. If the magnitude only falls, you are just below resonance.
If the system lag cannot be determined and the resonant frequency is not known,
estimate system lag at 90° for any calculations. If the system lag is not known
but the rotational frequency is known to be somewhere below the first critical,
estimate the system lag at 45°. If the rotational frequency is above the first crit-
ical, estimate at 135°. These values should approximate the location of the
heavy spot within 45°.

5-26 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 27 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Phase/magnitude Comparison at Resonance

Special Topics 5-27


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 28 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Vibration Transducer Phase


Transducer characteristics will also affect the phase of the readings. As with
system lag, if you are simply walking through the balance program by obtaining
reference and trial runs, this will not be cause for concern. However, if you want
to calculate the placement of trial weights or the location of the heavy spot, the
effect of the transducer or the units used must be
considered.
If you acquire data with any of the CSI piezoelectric transducers, the only phase
change to consider will be that of the magnitude units. This factor is:
• Displacement – 0°
• Velocity – 90°
• Acceleration – 180°
Since all CSI instrumentation measures phase counter to rotation, add the given
factors to the phase measurement to adjust for the type of units. These funda-
mental phase relationships are the result of peak acceleration leading peak
velocity by 90° and leading peak displacement by 180°.
If you utilize a mechanical (spring mass) velocity transducer, there is a phase lag
inherent in the design of the transducer which will have to be determined from
the manufacturer or through testing.

5-28 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 29 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

The following figure illustrates the phase readings which were obtained using
three different vibration magnitude units. Both the reference transducer (a pho-
totach) and the vibration transducer were at the same location (0°). Although
there are a few degrees variation due to the normal variation in the measurement
process, the general relationship can be observed.

Comparing Phase Readings

Special Topics 5-29


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 30 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Location of the Imbalance


Locate the vibratory high spot by locating the reference mark at the tach pick-
up. Then, starting at the vibration transducer from which the phase was
obtained, measure an angular distance equal to the phase reading against the
direction of rotation. This is the vibratory high spot. Then move around the rotor
in the direction of rotation an angular distance equal to the estimated system lag
from the vibratory high spot. This is the location of the heavy spot. In summary:
Heavy Spot = Angle of Vib Transducer + Phase + Units Type Adj. - System Lag

In the example illustrated below, the system lag was determined to be approxi-
mately 15°. The vibration transducer is at 90° relative to the phototach (as mea-
sured against rotation). An unbalance weight was placed at 330°. The actual
acquired phase data were as follows: 255° using displacement, 166° using
velocity, and 75° using acceleration.

Units Angle of + Phase + Units - System = Location


Vibration Reading Adj Lag of Heavy
Transducer Factor Spot
Disp 90° + 255° + 0° - 15° = 330°
Vel 90° + 166° + 90° - 15° = 331°
Acc 90° + 75° + 180° - 15° = 330°

5-30 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 31 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Placement of Trial Weight


While it is usually not necessary to locate the imbalance in order to place the
trial weight, occasionally you may want to do so. Some people simply like to try
to decrease the imbalance on the trial run. On the other hand, it may be essential
that the trial weight not increase the vibration levels further.
If the software being used has a trial weight option as part of the program, you
can simply input the required information. If not, approximate the heavy spot by
using the procedure just given and place the trial weight 180° from the heavy
spot.

Special Topics 5-31


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 32 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Amount of Imbalance
An estimation of the weight needed to offset the imbalance can be made pro-
viding certain information is known. The total vibrating weight is needed. This
is primarily the rotor weight, but also includes some vibratory mass contribution
from the bearings and bearing pedestals. A general rule of thumb is to use 110%
of the rotor weight to allow for this effect. Once you have calculated the
vibrating weight and have the data from the reference run, the amount of imbal-
ance can be estimated (neglecting any influence from amplification due to res-
onance) from the following equation:

where:
Ub = the amount of imbalance (oz.-in.)
w = the vibratory weight (oz.)
Xf = the magnitude of vibration (mils pk-pk)

Use the following equation to convert velocity or acceleration to displacement:

5-32 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 33 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Amplification Factor
The amount the vibration magnitude is amplified by the proximity of a reso-
nance is the amplification factor. As the rotational frequency approaches a res-
onance, the amplification factor increases. In simple terms, a trial weight which
should result in a 1 mil displacement would, with an amplification factor of 3,
result in 3 mils of displacement. If the amplification factor approaches 6-8, bal-
ancing becomes extremely difficult, if not impossible.
After reference run and trial run data have been acquired, the amplification
factor can be calculated. First, calculate the free space magnitude in mils PK-Pk
(Xf):

Then, divide the measured change in displacement caused by the trial weight by
the calculated free space magnitude to get the amplification factor (Af):

where:
Amp1 = magnitude (mils pk-pk) from reference run
Ø1 = phase reading in degrees from reference run
Amp2 = magnitude from trial run
Ø2 =phase reading from trial run

Special Topics 5-33


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 34 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

How Much Trial Weight?


Divide the unbalance by the amplification factor to get the amount of trial
weight to use.

Since you probably will not know the amplification factor before the trial run, a
general rule of thumb is to estimate a factor of 2-3. If the actual amplification
factor is above 6, the machine is probably too close to resonance to
balance.
Example: If the vibratory weight of a rotor is 110% of 1000 lbs, we have 1000
lbs X 1.10 X 16 oz./lb. = 17,600 oz.
By adding an unbalance (the trial weight) of 10 oz. inches (this is a 0.5 oz.
weight placed at a radius of 20 inches), we can calculate the expected change in
magnitude to be:

If the change in displacement is actually 3 mils, divide the actual by the calcu-
lated to get the amplification factor:

Therefore, if the original unbalance calculated from the reference run was 45
oz.-in, the correction weight would be the unbalance divided by the amplifica-
tion factor:

5-34 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 35 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Vectors
Vectors are lines which graphically represent amount and direction. In terms of
data acquired for balancing, the amount is given as vibration magnitude and the
direction as phase.
The following polar plot can be used to graphically plot the solution from a
simple balance job. Each ring on the polar plot represents 5 mils of magnitude.
The phase reference is noted in degrees at the circumference of the plot. The “as-
is” vector (from the reference run) is plotted as R at 10 mils and 30°. The trial
weight run data gives the resultant vector, noted as Tr, at 18 mils and 80°. Con-
necting the ends of the vectors, from R to Tr, produces a trial weight vector des-
ignated Tw.
The goal is to place a correction weight so that the Tw vector becomes equal in
weight and opposite in direction to the reference vector (R). Dividing the length
of the reference vector, R, by the length of the trial weight vector, Tw, and mul-
tiplying the trial weight by this number gives the amount of correction weight
to be added to the rotor. The angle ø, between the reference vector R, and the
trial weight vector Tw, is equal to the angle from the trial weight location at
which the correction weight will be placed. Move the weight in the same direc-
tion as the Tw vector would be moved to point in the opposite direction from the
Reference vector.

Special Topics 5-35


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 36 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Polar Plot

For this example, since the length of Tw is approximately 14 mils, divide the
length of the reference vector (10 mils) by 14 mils to get 0.714. Multiply the trial
weight by this factor to get the correction weight. The Tw vector would have to
move 97° to point in the direction opposite to the R vector. Therefore, place the
correction weight 97° from where the trial weight was placed.
When using the balancing program, the balance solution will be calculated for
you. However, understanding vectors gives you a better grasp of the data being
acquired and the effects of weight placements.

5-36 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 37 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Example Vector Worksheet

Mach: Date: Run No.: Ref Loc:


Comments:

Run Ampl/Phase - Ø Meas Point A Meas Point B


A
Ø
A
Ø
A
Ø

Special Topics 5-37


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 38 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Potential Problems During Balancing


When field balancing does not give the desired results, it is generally due to:
• Measurement errors
• Weight placement errors
• Vibration caused by something other than unbalance
• Lack of understanding of rotor dynamics of system
If any of the following items occur during the balance procedure, you may not
be successful in attempting to balance the unit.
• Tach readings are not steady – This may result from (1) poor speed
control of the driving unit (2) process related changes (such as fluctuating
load) (3) a faulty speed reference, such as a poorly aligned phototach, or
(4) a magnetic pickup placed too far from shaft. Since the imbalance
force varies with speed, this will cause the calculated influence co-
efficients to be inaccurate. It is impossible to separate force changes due
to weight placement from those due to speed.
• Trial run weights do not produce at least a 30 percent change in the
unbalance vector for at least one measurement location – A lesser change
can result in correction weight calculations subject to a significant degree
of error. Use a heavier trial weight, or different trial weight location to
increase the percentage change.
• 1xRPM magnitude and phase will not average to the same value on
repeated attempts even with long averaging times (several minutes) – Get
a synchronous average of the peak or acquire a high resolution spectra to
confirm the peak is 1xRPM. This can also be due to loose parts. If the
readings are not consistent and repeatable, the calculated balance
solution will not be valid.
• The measured amplification factor is greater than 6 – This may be due to
a rotational frequency close to a resonance which is amplifying the
vibration. Check the resonant frequencies. Slight changes in weight size
and location will cause dramatic changes in the apparent degree of
unbalance.

5-38 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 39 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

• Application of balance correction weights do not reduce vibration at all


positions by a factor of 3 or more – This indicates the percentage of im-
provement which can be expected based on the current influence co-
efficients is marginal. This may be due to the variability of the data being
greater than the amount of the desired improvement.
• Application of balance correction weights on trim runs cause readings at
some locations to increase while others decrease – You have probably
reached the limits of accuracy possible by using the current influence co-
efficients. Substitute the next to the last trim run for the original reference
run, and the last trim run data as trial run 1. Enter the last trim weight as
the trial weight. Calculate a new correction weight and compare it with
the last trim run calculation. The precision of the solutions can also be
limited by the degree of random variability in the data or due to non-
linearity inherent in the machine.
• Small modifications (1-2 percent) in the measured data produce large
changes (20-30 percent) in the calculated solution – The degree of change
caused by the trial weight was probably insufficient to produce accurate
influence coefficients. Repeat the trial run adding sufficient weight to
achieve at least a 30 percent change in the resulting vector. This means
the phase and/or magnitude should differ from the reference by 10
percent or more.
• Inconsistent results obtained using independent solutions in the
horizontal and vertical directions – The system is not responding linearly
in the radial directions. This can be due to the horizontal having a
different resonant frequency from the vertical.

Potential Problems During Balancing 5-39


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 40 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

5-40 Field Balancing Application Notes


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Appendix A

Accessories and Product Options

General

Cables and Adapters


See Chapter 5, “General Operation” of the 2130 Machinery Analyzer User’s
Manual for a list of cables, dongles, and adapters that are compatible with the
2130.
Items not listed in Chapter 5 of the 2130 Machinery Analyzer Us-
er’s Manual are not compatible with the 2130. Using an accessory
that is not supported corrupts data. Please contact Product Sup-
port if you have any questions regarding an accessory’s compati-
bility with the 2130

Other Accessories
Part
No. Description
8BA1.........Balancing Compass – can be used to assist in locating angular positions.
Magnetically mounted with clockwise and counter-clockwise 0-360° scaling
8BA15.......100 416SS Mounting Pads – 0.75 inch diameter
0760GP .....Accelerometer – color coded red, blue, black, or grey, if requested
648 ............4-Channel Adapter–Each channel has numeric (1-4) and color coding (red, blue,
black, and grey)
726-P.........Portable Balance Scales with Calibration Weight – 250 gram capacity, 0.1 gram
readability, 9V battery, and auto-shutoff
661 ............RG58c/u Cable, 4 foot – BNC(M) to BNC(M)
661-10 .......RG58c/u Cable, 10 foot – BNC(M) to BNC(M)
8BA20.......Set of 9 Re-usable Clamp-on Trial Weights – 0.25 oz. to 2.25 oz. (aluminum)

A-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Individual Weights

8BA20-A1 0.25 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/8 inch


-A2 .0.60 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/8 inch
-A3 .0.85 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/8 inch
-B1 .0.70 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/4 inch
-B2 .1.40 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/4 inch
-B3 .2.00 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/4 inch
-C1 .0.75 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/2 inch
-C2 .1.55 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/2 inch
-C3 .2.25 oz., max recommended material thickness 1/2 inch

8BA25.......Balance Scales and Trial Weight Kit – includes 726-P Portable Balance Scales,
8BA20 Trial Weight Set, Allen Wrench, and Protective Case

A-2 Accessories and Product Options


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Customer Support
CSI takes great pride in our customers and is committed to providing the highest
standard of customer support. Our number one priority is to provide prompt and
efficient service to all of our customers. To contact our Customer Support
department, please call (865) 671-4274 (4CSI). To reach the Sales Support
department, dial (865) 675-2110 and ask our receptionists to direct your call.
To extend the level of support to CSI customers, we have an electronic mail
system which is connected through the Internet directly to the Customer Support
group. The address is:
custserv@smtpg.compsys.com
Customer Support also has a Web page on the Internet. You can access it by vis-
iting our corporate Web page at:
http://www.compsys.com
Once there, choose the Customer Support option and a set of frames will be dis-
played with general information about CSI Customer Support. There are links
to specific information such as TechNotes, MasterService Warranties, and
Maintenance Quotes. Also, the following prompt provides a link to the Cus-
tomer Support Web page.

Note
Visit our Customer Service site for additional Customer Support
information.

Click on this option to access additional technical information and assistance


for CSI products.

Customer Support A-3


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

DoctorKnow™
The DoctorKnow system was originally developed to provide a means of trans-
ferring high volume, ever-changing technical information to support personnel
at CSI. Because it was so successful, further enhancements were made so that it
could also be provided to CSI customers. It now provides:
• A mechanism to FAX information to the customer (while on-line) and
• Direct access to the Customer Support Web page (through the Internet –
see previous section)

In the future, Customer Support plans to include file transfer capabilities. This
will allow prompt evaluation of customer data and/or setups. We also plan to
provide software updates (for customers with maintenance agreements) by
using the Internet.

Reliability Services
CSI provides a broad range of in-plant services including startups, database
troubleshooting and diagnostics. Our Reliability Services Department consists
of qualified individuals with experience in a variety of technologies and indus-
tries. For information, call (865) 675-2400, Ext 2358.

A-4 Accessories and Product Options


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Appendix B

CSI Balancing Compass™

The optional CSI Balancing Compass™ is used to measure angular locations


and relationships (an essential task when balancing rotating machinery). In
applications where the Balancing Compass can be used, it insures greater accu-
racy of measurements and reduces the risk of error. Angles can be measured
some distance from each other; the Balancing Compass does not have to be
placed immediately at the plane of interest. Degree scaling correlates directly to
the CSI convention of measuring angles and phase in degrees counter to rota-
tion.

CSI Balancing Compass™

Suggested Applications
The CSI Balancing Compass has two opposing scales (one red and one black).
Follow instructions shown on the label to match one of the two scales to the
direction your machine rotates when running. Use the selected scale for all read-
ings.

B-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Case 1 – To determine the angular position of a transducer or tachometer pick-


up from top dead center (TDC), refer to the figure below and complete the steps
that follow.

1.····Align a reference mark on the rotor to be balanced with the sensor, or


place a temporary reference mark on the shaft adjacent to the sensor for
which the angular position is to be determined.

B-2 CSI Balancing Compass™


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

2. ··· Attach the Balancing Compass to any axial face of the rotor where it can
be see throughout one rotation (end of shaft, axial face of the rotor itself,
or the axial face of anything attached to the shaft such as a sheave or
coupling). Without rotating the rotor, turn the Balancing Compass so the
indicator needle points to 0o.
3. ··· Turn the rotor until the reference mark is at TDC. The indicator needle
should now point to the measurement of the sensor location (in degrees).
Ensure that you use the degrees scale which matches the direction the
machine turns when operating.

B-3
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Case 2 – To locate the position on the rotor where a trial weight or solution
weight is to be placed, refer to the following figure and complete the steps that
follow.

1.····Align the rotor tachometer reference mark with any convenient


stationary reference mark (the tachometer pick-up, a mark at the access
door, etc.).

B-4 CSI Balancing Compass™


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

2. ··· Place the Balancing Compass on an axial face with the indicator needle
pointing at 0o.
3. ··· Turn the rotor until the indicator reads the desired angular position from
the applicable scale. This position is now aligned with the stationary
reference.

Note
The Balancing Compass has a magnetic backing for mounting to
any ferrous metal surface. An axial face on a horizontal shaft is re-
quired for proper application.

Ensure that you remove the Balancing Compass before starting or


operating the machine!

Technical Specifications

Physical Dimensions
Diameter: 3 inches
Thickness: 0.75 inches
Weight: 93 grams (3.3 oz.)

Double Scale
0-360° clockwise
0-360° counter clockwise

Magnetic Backing
Requires vertical orientation on axial face of the shaft or rotor

B-5
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

B-6 CSI Balancing Compass™


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Appendix C

Clamp-on Reusable Trial Weights

Figure 1– Reusable Trial Weight

Installation
CSI’s Model 8BA20 Trial Weights Assortment includes nine reusable clamp-on
trial weights. Weights are clamped on by using knurled cup point set screws in
combination with cone point set screws on the opposing side
(see “Reusable Trial Weight,” the picture above).
As a practical matter of safety, CSI recommends using trial weights
which can be securely bolted or welded to the rotor being bal-
anced.

C-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Warning!
CSI does not warrant the applicability or safety of using any
weight glued or clamped onto a rotor; including those contained in
this kit.

Use these weights at your own risk! Exercise extreme caution when
using weights such as these! Never allow anyone to stand in the po-
tential line-of-fire of a thrown weight!

Almost everyone who uses weights such as these will eventually have one
thrown from the rotor during machine operation. Information provided here is
intended to assist you in increasing the safety of the application, but in no way
guarantees use of these weights will be failure proof.
Some common-sense suggestions for increasing the holding strength when
applying clamp-on weights:
• Apply weights against an inner circumference of the rotor. Centrifugal
force will then be holding the weight against the inner surface of the rotor
rather than acting to pull the weight off the rotor.
• Apply weights so the set screws clamp behind, or over, a rim. Then if the
weight starts to slip, the set screws will be pulled up against the rim.
• If it is impossible to follow the previous suggestions, and the weight must
be clamped to a flat outer circumference of the rotor, consider these
options:
(a) In some cases, the holding strength can be enhanced by spot drilling
indentions for the set screws to tighten into.
(b) A few small weights may be more secure than one large weight if the
holding power of each weight is approximately equivalent.
• If the trial run will require more than 10-15 minutes of machine
operation, the set screws should be secured with a screw locking
compound or jam nuts to prevent vibration from loosening the screws.
However, never leave clamp-on trial weights as permanent solution
weights.

C-2 Clamp-on Reusable Trial Weights


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Torquing
It is relatively easy to over-torque the screws, even when using a 3-inch allen
wrench. Once the trial weight begins to yield excessively, little, or no additional
strength is gained by additional torquing. In fact, the metal may be over-stressed
and actually lose strength. The weights are flexed approximately 10 to 15 mils
at the torques shown in the Trial Weight Data Summary table that follows.

Testing
A test was conducted using an Instron tensile testing machine. Each trial weight
was attached to a piece of cold rolled steel and the force required to pull the trial
weight off was measured. Figures 2 – 4 show where this measured force for
removal falls when the centrifugal force generated by a specific weight at a
given speed and radius is plotted. Applying these trial weights near or above
these lines is obviously unsafe. Variations in exact weights, torques, surface
hardness and condition make it impossible to predict the true limits of usability
for these weights. Tests were conducted with three configurations:
1. Knurled cup point set screws at one side with no set screws on the
opposing side.
2. Knurled cup point set screws at one side with cone point set screws on
the opposing side; only the knurled cup set screws were turned/torqued.
3. Knurled cup point set screws at both sides; all screws turned/torqued.
As would be expected, both the 2nd and 3rd configurations proved to hold con-
siderably better than having set screws on only one side. The 3rd configuration
usually resulted in some performance improvement over the 2nd configuration
however, it gave less consistent results (probably due to the difficulty in getting
all the set screws torqued uniformly). The 2nd test of the same trial weight and
set screws generally gave better performance than the first test, however under
repeated use, it is expected that the set screws will eventually lose some ability
to set into the rotor surface. Therefore, regular inspection and periodic replace-
ment of the set screws is recommended.

C-3
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trial Weights Data Summary


Style Length Approximate Max Inch/ Approximate
(inches) Weight * Lbs Torque Hold (lbs) **
A1 0.4 7.4 g/0.25 oz 10 260
A2 1.0 17.4g/0.60 oz 10 515
A3 1.5 24.6 g/0.85 oz 10 530
B1 0.5 19.8 g/0.70 oz 25 690
B2 1.0 39.9 g/1.4 oz 25 1385
B3 1.5 57.1 g/2.00 oz 25 1760
C1 0.5 22.0 g/0.75 oz 30 750
C2 1.0 44.2 g/1.55 oz 30 1900
C3 1.5 63.5 g/2.25 oz 30 1615

* Weight with standard cup opposing cone set screw combination. Style Series
A using 0.25 x 0.5 (1/4 - 20 x 1/2) cup and 0.25 x 0.25 (1/4 - 20 x 1/4) cone
set screws. Styles B and C using 0.25 x 0.75 (1/4 - 20 x 3/4) cup and 0.25 x
0.3125 (1/4 - 20 x 5/16) cone set screws. These weights are approximate and
will vary slightly, especially if non-standard hardware sizes are used. Accu-
rate weighing is recommended before each use.
** Measured pounds of force required to pull the trial weight off a piece of cold
rolled steel in a direction of travel perpendicular to the set screws. Knurled
cup point set screws torqued as shown. Cone point set screws not turned/
torqued. Given value is the lower value of at least two tests.

C-4 Clamp-on Reusable Trial Weights


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Figure 2 – Series A Weights

Figure 3 – Series B Weights

C-5
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Figure 4 – Series C Weights

Figure 5 – Trial Weight Cross Sections

C-6 Clamp-on Reusable Trial Weights


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Appendix D

Approximate Hardware Weights

This appendix contains tables listing calculated weights of both coarse thread
(UNC) and fine thread (UNF) bolts. These tables are very useful in any bal-
ancing procedure when bolts are used to add balance weight.
Weights have been calculated for the following bolt hardware:
• Hex head cap screws
• Socket head cap screws
• Machine screws
• Socket head set screws
All weights are in ounces. Where applicable, the weight of nuts, flat washers,
lock washers, and the bolt head are also given.
Weights given in tables are for steel hardware. To find weights for hardware of
other materials:
• for stainless steel, multiply weight by.9880
• for aluminum, multiply weight by.3442
• for brass, multiply weight by 1.0766
To convert ounces to grams, multiply the weight in ounces by
28.3495.

D-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

D-2 Approximate Hardware Weights


97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Glossary

Amplification Factor
Mechanical magnification of the true unbalance effect.

Anchor Bolts (or Hold-down Bolts)


Bolts use to anchor or hold the machine to the base or
foundation.

Axial Float (or End Float)


Movement of one shaft along its centerline due to the freedom of movement per-
mitted by a journal bearing or sleeve bearing. This adjustment should be set
before performing vertical and horizontal moves.

Baseplate
The surface (often made of steel plate or cast iron) to which the feet of a machine
are attached. The baseplate is normally mounted on a foundation and grout.

Baud Rate
Unit of speed for data transmission over a serial communications link. The bal-
ance analyzers support rates from 300 to 57.6K baud.

Correction Weight
Weight required to correct unbalanced mass.

CPM
Cycles per minute. (Same as RPM.)

Cross Effect
Influence exerted by the unbalance in one plane on the vibration of another
plane.

Current Job
Job in the balance analyzer that is currently active – the one that can be easily
modified.

G-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Firmware
A term referring to the software that controls or instructs the function of the bal-
ance analyzer.

Foundation
The surface, often made of concrete, to which the machine baseplate is
mounted, often with grout between the baseplate and foundation to provide even
support.

Frequency
Number of times an event repeats in a specific period of time.

Heavy Spot
The actual location of material causing excess mass relative to the center of rota-
tion.

Hertz
The measurement of frequency in cycles per second.

High Spot
The location of the rotor where peak vibration occurs in response to the heavy
spot. Heavy spot differs from high spot due to system lag.

Hold-down Bolts
The bolts anchoring or holding the machine to the baseplate and foundation.

Inclinometer
A device that indicates the rotational position of shafts.

Induced Soft Foot


A type of soft foot that is caused by external forces (coupling, pipe strain, etc.)
acting on a machine independent of the foot to baseplate connection.

Job
Usually identified with a number and description; represents data accumulated
during an individual alignment or balance session.

G-2
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Master
When used as a communications term, it is the unit that controls and determines
when data will be transferred. In the Fast Bal system, the P/C is the Master and
the balance analyzer is the Slave.

Measurement Point
Location on the machine where a transducer is placed for data acquisition.

Mils
A unit of measure for displacement (thousandths of an inch).

Modem
A device that enables remote communications between the host computer and
the analyzer over telephone lines.

Notes
Specific observations that can be stored in each alignment or balance job along
with the collected data. These observations can be predefined notes or user-
defined notes that have been created via the analyzer’s keypad, or a combination
of the two methods.

Phase
The location of peak vibration relative to a reference pulse.

Predictive Maintenance
Technology of periodically monitoring the actual condition of machines to dis-
cover faults, to determine probable time of breakdown, and to provide sched-
uled downtime for repair that avoids excessive cost and lost production.

Primary Effect
Effect of balance weight on nearest support bearing.

RBM
Reliability Base Maintenance – the modern maintenance management method
that integrates preventive, predictive, and proactive maintenance strategies.
This total management method not only improves detection methods but uses
root cause analyses to find and correct the actual cause(s) of the problems
thereby eliminating unpredictable failures in the future.

G-3
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Reference Run
“As is” condition – data acquired before any weights are added or removed.

Repeatability
The consistency (or variation) of readings and results between consecutive sets
of measurements.

Resolution
The smallest change or amount that a measurement system can detect.

Rotor
The part (or assembly of parts) of a machine that spins or revolves as a single
unit. For alignment purposes, the shafts of both machines are the rotors.

RS232
A serial, asynchronous communication standard; a type designation for cables
that are used to connect communications ports on host computer, analyzer, and
telephone modems.

Slave
When used as a communications term, it is the unit that is controlled when data
is transferred. In the Fast Bal system, the P/C is the Master and the balance ana-
lyzer is the Slave.

Soft Foot
A term used to describe any condition where tightening or loosening the bolt(s)
of a single foot distorts the machine frame.

Stored Job
A job that has been moved from the current job location and stored in memory.
All the data related to that particular job will then be available for recall.

System Lag
Phase difference between heavy spot and high spot.

Trial Weight
Weight placed on rotor to determine the effect of altering mass at a specific loca-
tion.

G-4
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Trim Correction
Balance correction based on influence co-efficients from previous reference and
trial runs.

UltraMgr
CSI’s database management software package for alignment and balance data.

Unassigned Job
A job that has not been assigned to stations and machines in the UltraMgr data-
base.

Vectors
Graphical representation of phase and magnitude as a single line on a polar plot.
The angle of the line represents phase and the length of the line represents mag-
nitude.

Weight Plane
Cross section perpendicular to a rotor shaft where weight can be added or
removed for balance adjustments.

G-5
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

G-6
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 1 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Index

A Amplification Factor Solution Operation


Accessories 2-189
Fast Bal accessories 1-6 Amplification Solution Function Keys 2-189
Acquire Data analysis, problem 5-7
plot information 2-112 Analyzer
Acquire Data Operation 2-54, 2-111 attach 3-47, 3-52, 3-57
Acquire Data Operations 2-73 downloading a job 3-59
Acquire the Balance Data – Reference (as-is) uploading data 3-65
Run 4-17 Analyzer Serialization 1-1
Acquire the Balance Data – Trial Run #1 Data Application Notes
4-27 Field Balancing 5-1
Acquire the Balance Data – Trial Run #2 Data Applied Weight 2-92
4-36 Applied Weight Function Keys 2-97
Acquire Trim Data 2-103 (one weight plane) 2-94
Acquire Trim Data – Tolerance Check 2-116 Applied Weight Operation 2-93
Acquiring Balance Data 2-53 assigned job 2-3
Acquiring Readings 2-73, 2-111 Assigning Notes to the Job 4-58
adding trial weights 2-59 Axial 1xRPM Vibration Greater than Radial
Adjust Fixed Weights Calculation 2-164 2-80
Adjust Fixed Weights Function Keys 2-164
Adjust Fixed Weights Solution Function Keys B
2-167 balance job
Adjust Fixed Weights Solution Operation steps to acquire data 2-54
2-166 Balance Job and Tach Configuration 2-17
Adjust Radius Calculation 2-183 Operation 2-17
Adjust Radius Function Keys 2-183 Balance Job and Tach Configuration Function
Adjust Radius Solution Function Keys 2-186 Keys 2-19
Alternate Function Key 2-128 Balance Job Setup 4-2
Alternate Key Operation 2-127 Balance Program
Alternate Keys 2-127 four steps 2-7
amplification factor 5-33 Balancing
Amplification Factor Calculation 2-187 in the field 5-1
Amplification Factor Function Keys 2-187 balancing

I-1
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 2 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

consistency 5-4 Default Settings


general outline 2-5 (Advanced Mode Only) 2-45
overview 5-1 default setup 2-45
problems 5-38 Delta RPM 2-31
Base Firmware Device Name 3-2
updating 3-71 Downloading a Route 3-59
Basic and Advanced Job Setup 2-18
Basic Balance Mode E
additional notes 2-24 Edit Data Function Keys 2-143
bearing life 5-2 Edit Data Screen Operation 2-141
Beginning the Balancing Procedure 4-2 Edit/Review Data Key 2-130
Editing Data 2-141
C Equipment
Calculate the Balance Correction 4-42 available equipment and options 1-4
Calculate Trim Correction 4-55 Estimate Residual Vibration Operation 2-96,
Calculator Mode 2-152 2-100
Calculator Mode Function Keys 2-153 Estimate Results 2-96
Calculator Mode Operation 2-152 Estimate Trial Weight Calculation 2-172
Case Studies 2-3 Estimate Trial Weight Function Keys 2-173
Circumference Conversion Calculation 2-179 Estimate Trial Weight Solution Function Keys
Circumference Conversion Function Keys 2-178
2-179 Estimate Trial Weights Solution Operation
Circumference Conversion Solution Function 2-176
Keys 2-182 Estimated Residual Vibration
Circumference Conversion Solution Examples 2-101
Operation 2-181 Estimated Residual Vibration Function Keys
Completing Measurement Runs 2-82 2-96, 2-101
connecting Extending Machine Life 5-2
Ethernet card 3-16
Serial 3-12 F
USB 3-6 FAST Bal II menu maps 2-3 to 2-5
current job 2-3 Fixed Weights Calculation 2-164
from 2-59
D Function Keys
data One Weight Plane 2-146
reference 5-15 Two or more weight planes 2-147
Data Acquisition Function Keys 2-75, 2-114
Data File 3-53

I-2
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 3 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

H Main Menu Function Keys 2-8


Host Information 3-20 Main Menu Operations 2-6
Make the Required Trim Correction 4-43
I manual, organization of the 1-1
Measurement Plane Setup 2-35
imbalance 5-5, 5-30, 5-32
Measurement Plane Setup - Default Settings
Influence Coefficients - Reviewing Data
2-45
2-136
Measurement Plane Setup Function Keys
Influence Coefficients Function Keys 2-137
2-37
Influence Coefficients Screen Operation
Measurement Plane Setup Operation 2-36
2-136
Measurement Points 2-21
measurement points
J default settings 2-45
Job defining 5-13
modifications 2-12 Measurement Speeds Function Keys 2-31
Job Description Function Keys 2-9 Modified Job 2-12
Job Manager Function Keys 2-10 modifying a job 2-13
Job Setup 2-14 multiple plane balancing 5-19
Job Setup Data Units Definitions 2-117 Mux
Job Setup Operation 2-16 mux enabled feature 2-34
jobs
assigned 2-3
N
changing setup 2-12
Note
current 2-3
how do I add a note? 2-198
defining 2-14
how do I clear all of my notes? 2-198
definitions 2-3
how do I delete a note? 2-198
stored 2-3
how do I write my own note? 2-198
types of 2-3
Notepad 4-58
unassigned 2-3
Notes 2-197, 4-58

L
O
losing transducer signal 2-77
One Weight Plane Setup Function Keys 2-146
Overview
M Fast Bal job 4-1
machine life 5-2
Machinery Health Manager Databases /
P
Analyzer / Data Files 3-38
phase 5-25, 5-28
Main Menu 2-6
plane

I-3
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 4 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

correction 5-13 (Advanced Mode only) 2-67


multiple 5-19 Select Measurement Speed Function Keys
weight 5-13 2-68
Prerequisites, UltraMgr Software 1-2 Select Measurement Speed Operation 2-103
primary effect 5-19 Sensor Setup 2-33, 2-38
problem analysis 5-7 Sensor Setup Function Keys 2-33, 2-38
problems during balancing 5-38 Software Databases / Analyzer / Data Files
3-38
R Speed
RBMcom 3-1, 3-25 balance job example 4-5
Data Dump Setup 3-28 entering speed 2-31
Menu Bar 3-26 Speed Setup 2-30
Sensor Sensitivity 3-27 speeds, defining 5-14
Toolbar 3-36 Split Angle Calculation 2-155
User Preferences 3-32 Split Angle Function Keys 2-155
Reference Run Balancing Watchdog Split Angle Solution Function Keys 2-158
acquiring data 2-78 Split Angle Solution Screen Operation 2-157
reference run data, taking 5-15 Static/Couple Analysis Calculation 2-168
Review Data Function Keys 2-133 Static/Couple Analysis Function Keys 2-168
Review Data Screen Operation 2-131 Static/Couple Analysis Solution Function
Review/Edit Data Key 2-130 Keys 2-171
Review/Edit Data Operation 2-130 Static/Couple Analysis Solution Operation
Reviewing Data 2-131 2-170
Reviewing Data - Influence Coefficients stored job 2-3
2-136 Sum Weights Calculation 2-159
Reviewing Data - Tolerance Check 2-138 Sum Weights Function Keys 2-160
RPM out of tolerance warning 2-77 Sum Weights Solution Function Keys 2-163
Sum Weights Solution Screen Operation
2-162
S system lag 5-26
sample job 4-2
Select Calculation Function Keys 2-153
Select Measurement 2-55 T
Select Measurement Function Keys 2-57, Tach Configuration 2-26
2-72, 2-109 Tach Configuration Function Keys 2-26
Select Measurement Operation 2-55, 2-69 Tachometer Setup 2-28
Select Measurement Point 2-69, 2-105 Tachometer Timeout 2-77
Select Measurement Screen Operation 2-105
Select Measurement Speed 2-103

I-4
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 5 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

Toggle Direction Rotation 2-27, 2-38, 2-48, unbalance


2-62, 2-64, 2-75, 2-86, 2-95, 2-99, (also see imbalance) 5-7
2-114, 2-119, 2-140, 2-146, 2-148, Units Conversion Calculation 2-190
2-158, 2-163, 2-167, 2-171, 2-178 Units Conversion Function Keys 2-190
balance job example 4-7 Uploading Data 3-65
Tolerance Check - Reviewing Data 2-138 USB driver, installing 3-6
Tolerance Check Function Keys 2-119, 2-140 USB, using 3-10
Tolerance Check Screen Operation 2-138 User Defined Notes 2-198
trial
run 5-15 V
weights 5-31, 5-34 vectors 5-35
Trial Run 1, 2, 3, 4 2-58 Vibration is Direction Sensitive 2-79
Trial Run Weight Setup 2-59, 2-65, 2-150 View Balance Correction 2-84, 2-192
Trial Run Weight Setup Function Keys View Balance Correction Function Keys
(one weight plane) 2-61 (one-weight plane) 2-86
(two or more weight planes) 2-63 (two or more weight planes) 2-87
Trial Run Weight Setup Operation 2-60 View Balance Correction Function Keys (one
trial weights, adding 2-58 weight plane) 2-194
trim balancing 5-5, 5-22 View Balance Correction Function Keys (two
Trim Correction 4-43 or more weight planes) 2-195
next required 4-57 View Balance Correction Operation 2-84,
Trim Correction – Acquire Trim Data 4-49 2-192
Trim Correction – Applied Weight 4-44
Trim Run 2-89
Trim Run Operation 2-90 W
Trim Run Status 2-90 Waiting for Trigger 2-77
Trim Run Status Function Keys 2-92 Weight Plane Setup 2-46
troubleshooting 5-38 Weight Plane Setup Function Keys 2-48
Two or More Weight Plane Setup Screen Weight Plane Setup Operation 2-47
Function Keys 2-147 Weight Planes 2-19
Weight Setup Screens Operation 2-144
weights
U trial 5-15, 5-31, 5-34
UltraMgr Software and Prerequisites 1-2
UltraMgr/FAST Bal II
additional concepts 2-4
operating cases 2-3 to 2-4
overview 2-2 to 2-5
unassigned job 2-3

I-5
97059.2_Fast Bal.book Page 6 Tuesday, June 5, 2007 8:51 AM

I-6

You might also like